| manuals | |||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| various | Users Manual | 130.66 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 116.66 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 106.28 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 170.51 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 168.73 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 162.75 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 183.83 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 163.36 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 184.05 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 144.73 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 131.62 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 121.70 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Users Manual | 283.58 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 215.20 KiB | April 22 2025 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 123.48 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 1.25 MiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 178.32 KiB | October 29 2024 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 252.35 KiB | October 29 2024 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 247.87 KiB | October 29 2024 | |||||
| various | Users Manual | 751.92 KiB | April 22 2025 | |||||
| various | Internal Photos | 1.14 MiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | Internal Photos | 918.80 KiB | January 26 2024 / January 28 2024 | |||||
| various | Internal Photos | 1.25 MiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Internal Photos | 1.15 MiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | |||||
| various | External Photos | 1.43 MiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | External Photos | 1.57 MiB | January 26 2024 / January 28 2024 | |||||
| various | External Photos | 1.31 MiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | External Photos | 1.80 MiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 69.11 KiB | October 10 2023 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 65.84 KiB | October 10 2023 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 68.23 KiB | October 10 2023 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 1.94 MiB | October 10 2023 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 1.95 MiB | October 10 2023 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 1.55 MiB | October 29 2024 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 139.70 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 698.80 KiB | April 22 2025 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 138.75 KiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 132.38 KiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 264.71 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 49.12 KiB | April 22 2025 | |||||
| various | Test Report | 815.83 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Test Report | 500.12 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | RF Exposure Info | 508.60 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 111.20 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Attestation Statements | 206.65 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 118.58 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Test Report | 2.21 MiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 204.61 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Confidential Block Diagram | Block Diagram | August 12 2026 | confidential | ||||
| various | Confidential Operation Description | Operational Description | August 12 2026 | confidential | ||||
| various | Confidential Schematics Host | Schematics | August 12 2026 | confidential | ||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 191.32 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Attestation Statements | 3.75 MiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Test Setup Photos | 535.76 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 | |||||
| various | Attestation Statements | 118.42 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 14.42 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 124.16 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | RF Exposure Info | 253.98 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | Test Report | 623.97 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | Test Setup Photos | 429.52 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | Attestation Statements | 934.56 KiB | July 27 2026 | |||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | April 29 2026 / April 30 2026 | ||||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | April 29 2026 / April 30 2026 | ||||||
| various | Operational Description | Operational Description | April 28 2026 | confidential | ||||
| various | RF Exposure Info | April 30 2026 | ||||||
| various | Schematics | Schematics | April 28 2026 | confidential | ||||
| various | Test Report | April 29 2026 / April 30 2026 | ||||||
| various | Users Manual | Users Manual | April 28 2026 / October 26 2026 | delayed release | ||||
| various | Test Report | September 23 2025 | ||||||
| various | Attestation Statements | September 23 2025 | ||||||
| various | Block Diagram | Block Diagram | September 23 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | September 23 2025 | ||||||
| various | Operation Description | Operational Description | September 23 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Schematic Diagram | Schematics | September 23 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Test Report | April 22 2025 | ||||||
| various | RF Exposure Info | April 22 2025 | ||||||
| various | Attestation Statements | April 22 2025 | ||||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | April 22 2025 | ||||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | April 22 2025 | ||||||
| various | Confidential Schematics | Schematics | April 22 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Attestation Statements | April 22 2025 | ||||||
| various | Test Report | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | ||||||
| various | RF Exposure Info | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | ||||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | ||||||
| various | Confidential Operation Description HJC18N | Operational Description | April 14 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Confidential Operation Description HJC9N | Operational Description | April 14 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Confidential Schematics HJC18N | Schematics | April 14 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Confidential Schematics HJC9N | Schematics | April 14 2025 | confidential | ||||
| various | Test Setup Photos | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 | ||||||
| various | Test Report | 2.60 MiB | October 29 2024 | |||||
| various | Scheamtic Diagram HJSR96 | Schematics | October 29 2024 | confidential | ||||
| various | Scheamtic Diagram HJSR96B HJSR96C | Schematics | October 29 2024 | confidential | ||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 698.90 KiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | Attestation Statements | 712.00 KiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 648.71 KiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | Test Setup Photos | 585.23 KiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | Attestation Statements | 156.98 KiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | Test Report | 1.09 MiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | RF Exposure Info | 1.36 MiB | February 01 2024 | |||||
| various | RF Exposure Info | 774.01 KiB | January 26 2024 / January 28 2024 |
HJSR32 Ble Function Declaration 1
Key label Function Short press to release one key run to TV position (with initial value) Multiplexing function: Long press FLAT+TV button for 5 seconds, backlight flashes, control box buzzer rings three times, the current head motor and foot motor position to the new TV position (power off will not be cleared) Note: Long press FLAT+ head rise for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the control box buzzer rings three times to restore to the initial fixed position Short press to release one key Run to SNORE position (with initial value) Reuse function: Long press FLAT+SNORE button for 5 seconds, backlight flashes, control box buzzer rings three times, the current head motor and foot motor position to the new SNORE position (power off will not clear) Note: Long press FLAT+ head rise for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the control box buzzer rings three times to restore to the initial fixed position Short press release one key Run to ZG position (with initial value) Reuse function: Long press FLAT+ZG button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the buzzer of the control box rings three times, and the current position of the motor of the head and the motor of the foot is changed to the new ZG position (not cleared after power failure). Note: Long press FLAT+ head rise for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the control box buzzer rings three times to restore to the initial fixed position Turn on/off underbed light (default: 5 minutes) Long press the button, the head motor rises, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the head motor drops, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, all the motor rises, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, all the motor drops, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the foot motor rises, release the button to stop the movement 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
10 11 12 13 Long press the button, the motor of the foot drops, release the button to stop the movement Short press release one key Run to M1 position (no initial value) Reuse function: Long press the M1 button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the buzzer of the control box rings, and all the motor positions are remembered as the new M1 positions (not cleared after power failure). One-key reset, all the motor return to the position of 0 stroke, power on reset. Short press to release one key Run to M2 position (no initial value) Reuse function: Long press the M2 button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the buzzer of the control box rings, and all the motor positions are remembered as the new M2 positions (not cleared after power failure). 14 Mode switching --CONSTANT-PULSE-WAVE 15 16 17 If the massager is in working state, click this key, all massagers stop working; If the massager is in the inactive state, press this key to timing the working time of the massager, 10mins/20mins/30mins, corresponding indicator 1/2/3 on the top will be switched on successively. The head massager starts to work in constant mode, tap to switch the function cycle of "1 /2 /3 / off" successively, and automatically turn off after 30 minutes of work;
The foot massager starts to work in constant mode, tap to switch the function cycle of "1 /2 /3 / off" successively, and automatically turn off after 30 minutes of work;
18 Press the flashlight to turn on, release the flashlight to turn off. Coding method:
[Remote control head up + head down + control box to code key] Control box buzzer sounds, indicating successful code
* The control box has a reset function for the code key (click to release the reset)
* Control box synchronization line function, complete synchronization, synchronization
* The control box is powered on and reset. During the reset process, press any key to interrupt the motor in motion
* If an unexpected power failure occurs during operation, please wait until the automatic reset is complete or press FLAT to reset before using!!!
Remote control mutual learning function (A: learn remote control, B: learn remote control) :
1. B learns A: press B's head drop + foot drop for 5S, and the flashlight is on. Press A's head rise + head drop within 10S, and B's flashlight blinks, indicating successful learning. 3
2, learning function release: long press B's head rise + foot drop 5S, flashlight light, indicating successful release 3. When the remote control that has been successfully learned is powered on again, the flashlight flashes, indicating that the remote control has been successfully learned. At this time, the remote control can no longer pair the code, and the learning function needs to be lifted to pair the code Long press the remote control head up + head down without releasing, while installing the battery replacement remote control code value Note:
To protect the reliability and safety of the motor and control box, do not switch keys frequently. Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, 4
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 5
| various | Users Manual | 130.66 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
HJSR32B Ble Function Declaration 1
Key label Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Flashlight Long press the button, the head motor rises, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the head motor drops, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the foot motor rises, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the motor of the foot drops, release the button to stop the movement The massager starts to work in constant mode, tap to switch the function cycle of "1 /2 /3 / off" successively, and turn off automatically after 30 minutes of work;
Underbed light on/off (automatically off after 5 minutes by default) One-key reset, all the motor return to the position of 0 stroke, power on reset. Short press release one key Run to ZG position (with initial value) Reuse function: Long press FLAT+ZG button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the buzzer of the control box rings three times, and the current position of the motor of the head and the motor of the foot is changed to the new ZG position (not cleared after power failure). Note: Long press FLAT+ head rise for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the control box buzzer rings three times to restore to the initial fixed position FLAT+ Under bed light Turn on the flashlight, release and turn off the flashlight Coding method:
[Remote control head up + head down + control box to code key] Control box buzzer sounds, indicating successful code
* The control box has a reset function for the code key (click to release the reset)
* Control box synchronization line function, complete synchronization, synchronization
* The control box is powered on and reset. During the reset process, press any key to interrupt the motor in motion
* If an unexpected power failure occurs during operation, please wait until the automatic reset is complete or press FLAT to reset before using!!!
Remote control mutual learning function (A: learn remote control, B: learn remote control) :
1. B learns A: press B's head drop + foot drop for 5S, and the flashlight is on. Press A's head rise + head drop within 10S, and B's flashlight blinks, 2
indicating successful learning. 2, learning function release: long press B's head rise + foot drop 5S, flashlight light, indicating successful release. 3. When the remote control that has been successfully learned is powered on again, the flashlight flashes, indicating that the remote control has been successfully learned. At this time, the remote control can no longer pair the code, and the learning function needs to be lifted to pair the code Long press the remote control head up + head down without releasing, while installing the battery replacement remote control code value Note:
To protect the reliability and safety of the motor and control box, do not switch keys frequently. Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 3
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 4
| various | Users Manual | 116.66 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
HJSR32C Ble Function Declaration 1
Key label Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 Long press the button, the head motor rises, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the head motor drops, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the foot motor rises, release the button to stop the movement Long press the button, the motor of the foot drops, release the button to stop the movement One key reset, all the motor back to the stroke of 0 position Short press release one key Run to ZG position (with initial value) Reuse function: Long press the FLAT+ZG button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the buzzer rings 3 times, the current head motor and foot motor position to the new ZG position (power off will not be cleared) Note: Long press FLAT+ head rise for 5 seconds, backlight flashes, buzzer sounds, return to the initial fixed position Coding method:
[Remote control head up + head down + control box code key] Buzzer sounds, indicating successful code
* The control box has a reset function for the code key, click to release the rese
* Control box synchronization line function, complete synchronization, synchronization
* The control box is powered on and reset, and cannot be interrupted during the reset Remote control mutual learning function (A: learn remote control, B: learn remote control) :
1. B learns A: Press the head up and foot down of B for 5S, and the backlight blinks. Then release the button. Press the head up and foot down of A for 10S, and the backlight of B blinks 1. 2. Release the learning function: Press and hold B's head lift + foot drop for 5S. If the backlight blinks, the learning function is released successfully Long press the remote control head up + head down without releasing, while installing the battery replacement remote control code value Note:
To protect the reliability and safety of the motor and control box, do not switch keys frequently. 2
Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 3
| various | Users Manual | 106.28 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
Product specification Remote control key diagram YS-SR77-001 1 Remote control function description 1YS-SR77-001 Key label 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Feature UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press the memory position button within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sounds, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold down the flashlight and then press LOCK for about 3s, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Hold down the flashlight and press FLAT for about 3s, the backlight flashes three times, the buttons in all positions of the remote control enter the continuous press mode, release the button and the motor stops. Key lock function: Long press this key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, then the remote control key is unavailable;
Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising FLAT one-button reset, all motors retract to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, turn off the underbed light
(power on without reset) Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop PILLOW rise: Hold down this key, PILLOW motor begins to rise, release this key, PILLOW motor rise stops LUMBAR rise: Hold down this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, 2 release this key, the LUMBAR motor stops rising The motor runs to the RELAX position (with initial values) with one click. (RELAX = ZG) Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press RELAX within 2s, and the buzzer rings three times to record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the lamp strip to RELAX. (Power off does not clear) PILLOW drop: Hold down this key, PILLOW motor began to fall, release this key, PILLOW motor drop stop LUMBAR decline: Hold down this key, the LUMBAR motor begins to decline, release this key, the LUMBAR motor decline stops The motor runs to the WAKE UP position with one key (with initial value). (WAKE UP = M1) Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press WAKE UP within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager, and light bar status to WAKE UP. (Power off does not clear) Run the motor to the SNORE position with one key (with initial value). When the one-key release mode is used, flatten and close the massager after 15min. Press any key to exit the timing. Continuous press mode no timing. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SNORE within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SNORE. (Power off does not clear) The motor runs to the SLEEP position (with initial value) with one click. (SLEEP = M2) Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SLEEP within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SLEEP. (Power off does not clear) If the head massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium
- > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. If the massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the foot massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium
- > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. If the massager is not open, press the button to open the massager 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Mode switching: CONSTANT- Low speed WAVE- Medium speed WAVE- high speed WAVE Press and hold for 5s to turn off the massager. The intensity remained unchanged after the mode was switched Reduce the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, when the lowest strength is reached, press the massager again to close. Reduce the strength of the foot massager by 3, and press the massager again to close when it reaches the lowest strength. 20 21 Coding method:
Keep pressing the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding mode:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Control box wired synchronization function:. 1. When two control boxes are connected with the synchronization line, one control box is controlled, and the other control box runs synchronously with the control box. 2. Press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes, and the buzzer "beep" "beep" "beep" enters the Split-top synchronization mode. In this mode, the head motor is in the sub-control mode, and the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with its successful alignment, no matter the head motor is running or the head motor corresponding to the memory position key. Press the head drop and foot drop buttons again, and the buzzer makes a long sound to release the Split-top synchronization mode. Note:
Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function The following are reserved functions M3: The motor runs to the M3 position with one click Reuse function: Record the current motor position and the status of the massager and light bar to M3. (Power off does not clear) M4: The motor runs to M4 position with one click Reuse function: Record the current motor position, massager and light bar status to M4. (Power off does not clear) massage off: Turn off all massagers massage on/off: Turn the massager on/off (default: 15Min when turned on, and in 19 20 21 22 4 the same state as when last turned off) 23 24 25 Clear memory: All memory locations can be reset to the factory default memory location Head and foot motors extend at the same time Head and foot motors retract simultaneously Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 5
| various | Users Manual | 170.51 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
Product specification Remote control key diagram 1 Remote control function description Key label 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Feature UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press the memory position button within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sounds, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold down the flashlight and then press LOCK for about 3s, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Hold down the flashlight and press FLAT for about 3s, the backlight flashes three times, the buttons in all positions of the remote control enter the continuous press mode, release the button and the motor stops. Key lock function: Long press this key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, then the remote control key is unavailable;
Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising FLAT one-button reset, all motors retract to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, turn off the underbed light
(power on without reset) Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop The motor runs to the WAKE UP position with one key (with initial value). (WAKE UP = M1) Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press WAKE UP within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager, and light bar status to WAKE UP. (Power off does not clear) Run the motor to the SNORE position with one key (with initial 2 value). When the one-key release mode is used, flatten and close the massager after 15min. Press any key to exit the timing. Continuous press mode no timing. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SNORE within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SNORE. (Power off does not clear) PILLOW rise: Hold down this key, PILLOW motor begins to rise, release this key, PILLOW motor rise stops PILLOW descent: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor begins to descend, release this key, and the PILLOW motor descent stops The motor runs to the RELAX position (with initial values) with one click. (RELAX = ZG) Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press RELAX within 2s, and the buzzer rings three times to record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the lamp strip to RELAX. (Power off does not clear) The motor runs to the SLEEP position (with initial value) with one click. (SLEEP = M2) Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SLEEP within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SLEEP. (Power off does not clear) If the head massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium
- > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. If the massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the foot massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium
- > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. If the massager is not open, press the button to open the massager Mode switching: CONSTANT- Low speed WAVE- Medium speed WAVE- high speed WAVE Press and hold for 5s to turn off the massager. The intensity remained unchanged after the mode was switched Reduce the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, when the lowest strength is reached, press the massager again to close. Reduce the strength of the foot massager by 3, and press the 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 massager again to close when it reaches the lowest strength. Coding method:
1. Continue to press the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding method:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Control box wired synchronization function:
1. When two control boxes are connected with the synchronization line, one control box is controlled, and the other control box runs synchronously with the control box. 2. Press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes, and the buzzer "beep" "beep" "beep" enters the Split-top synchronization mode. In this mode, the head motor is in the sub-control mode, and the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with its successful alignment, no matter the head motor is running or the head motor corresponding to the memory position key. Press the head drop and foot drop buttons again, and the buzzer makes a long sound to release the Split-top synchronization mode. Note:Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function Note:
To protect the reliability and safety of the motor and control box, do not switch keys frequently. 4 Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 5
| various | Users Manual | 168.73 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
Product specification Remote control key diagram 1 Key label 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Feature UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press the memory position button within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sounds, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold down the flashlight and then press LOCK for about 3s, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Hold down the flashlight and press FLAT for about 3s, the backlight flashes three times, the buttons in all positions of the remote control enter the continuous press mode, release the button and the motor stops. Key lock function: Long press this key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, then the remote control key is unavailable;
Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising FLAT one-button reset, all motors retract to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, turn off the underbed light
(power on without reset) Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop The motor runs to the WAKE UP position with one key (with initial value). (WAKE UP = M1) Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press WAKE UP within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager, and light bar status to WAKE UP. (Power off does not clear) Run the motor to the SNORE position with one key (with initial value). When the one-key release mode is used, flatten and close the massager after 15min. Press any key to exit the timing. 2 Continuous press mode no timing. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SNORE within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SNORE. (Power off does not clear) The motor runs to the RELAX position (with initial values) with one click. (RELAX = ZG) Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press RELAX within 2s, and the buzzer rings three times to record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the lamp strip to RELAX. (Power off does not clear) The motor runs to the SLEEP position (with initial value) with one click. (SLEEP = M2) Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SLEEP within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SLEEP. (Power off does not clear) If the head massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium
- > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. If the massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the foot massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium
- > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. If the massager is not open, press the button to open the massager Mode switching: CONSTANT- Low speed WAVE- Medium speed WAVE- high speed WAVE Press and hold for 5s to turn off the massager. The intensity remained unchanged after the mode was switched Reduce the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, when the lowest strength is reached, press the massager again to close. Reduce the strength of the foot massager by 3, and press the massager again to close when it reaches the lowest strength. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 3 Coding method:
1. Continue to press the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding method:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Control box wired synchronization function:
1. When two control boxes are connected with the synchronization line, one control box is controlled, and the other control box runs synchronously with the control box. 2. Press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes, and the buzzer "beep" "beep" "beep" enters the Split-top synchronization mode. In this mode, the head motor is in the sub-control mode, and the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with its successful alignment, no matter the head motor is running or the head motor corresponding to the memory position key. Press the head drop and foot drop buttons again, and the buzzer makes a long sound to release the Split-top synchronization mode. Note:Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function Note:
To protect the reliability and safety of the motor and control box, do not switch keys frequently. Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 4 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 5
| various | Users Manual | 162.75 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
Remote control key diagram Fixed position (red reserved) Power-on reset mm Fixed position Head Foot YES ZG 34 126 Alignment line Align the code and reset SNORE LOUNGE 22 0 85 60 TV 123 100 1
Remote control function description Key label Feature 1 2 Full lock function: press for about 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the buzzer rings three times, all functions of the entire remote control are locked, power off and power on to keep the state before power off (APP function is unavailable); Press and hold again for about 5 seconds, the backlight blinks, and the buzzer rings three times. After unlocking, all functions are available Half lock function: Press the lock + pause (1+7) at the same time for about 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the buzzer sounds twice. The remote control enters the semi-lock state, and only locks the function of the music oscillator (3 to 9 keys); Press and hold again for about 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the buzzer sounds twice to unlock the function After the full lock buzzer rings three times, press any key (except the lock key), the buzzer rings three times to remind: the half lock buzzer rings two times, press the music key part, the buzzer rings two times to remind Underbed light - seven-color light, press 1-7 times, one color at a time, cycle, long press 5S backlight flicker, turn off the underbed light, default 5min automatic turn off Bluetooth switch: When the device is powered on and Bluetooth is off, the Bluetooth device cannot be searched, and the button in the music follow-
up operation area does not respond Press this button, the Bluetooth function will be turned on, and the audio prompt "Bluetooth on, please wait" will be turned on, and the Bluetooth device (ZYKJ_XXXXX) will be found and connected. After the 3 connection is successful, the audio prompt "bluetooth connected" will be displayed, and music will be played. When the vibrator is powered on for the first time, the music is followed by the default 2 intensity (if the vibration intensity has been manually adjusted before opening, it will vibrate according to the adjusted intensity) Press the button again, the Bluetooth function is turned off, and the sound prompts "Bluetooth off". 2
In the music follow-up mode, press this button to increase the speaker volume, a total of 15 gears, keep 15 gears after the highest level, the sound prompt "Maximum volume" vibration intensity is not affected (no 4 change for the time being, now 10 gears). In the music follow-up mode, press this button to reduce the speaker 5 Volume. After setting the tone to the lowest setting, the sound prompts
"Min Volume", and the vibration intensity is not affected Follow-up enhancement: In the music follow-up mode, press this button to increase the vibration intensity of the follow-up, and cycle according to 6 0-1-2-3 gear (enter the music follow-up mode, default 2 gear) (audio real-time broadcast status :massager off/massager low /massager medium/massager high) 7 8 9 Music Pause/Play: In music follow mode, press this button to pause or continue playing music In music follow up mode, press this button to switch up the track In music follow up mode, press this button to switch down the track 10 Back up (motor out), release to stop 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 The motor runs to the M position with one key (no initial value). Multiplexing function: FLAT+M, backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record the current motor position to M (power off does not clear) Leg up (motor out), release to stop Back down (motor retracted), release to stop One-button reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position, power-on reset Leg down (motor retracted), release to stop The motor runs to the ZG position (with initial value) with one click. Multiplexing function: FLAT+ZG, backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record current motor position to ZG (power off clear) The motor runs to the SNORE position (with initial value) with one click. Multiplexing function: FLAT+SNORE, backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record the current motor position to SNORE
(power off to clear) Reuse function key: Before pressing the key, if the massager is in working state, all the massagers will be turned off after pressing the key, and the working time of the massage motor for the next time will be set 10min, 3
20min,30min respectively. The timing time is displayed through two indicators. If the massager is not in working state, the working time of the massage motor is directly fixed for the next time
(Status audio broadcast: massager off) Head massager enhancement: Press the button, if the head massager does not start, start the head massager and enter "CONSTANT" mode; If the head massage motor is started, increase the vibrational intensity of the massager,1 23 off, cycle switch
(default 30 minutes off) Intensity 1,10 minutes light red, intensity 2, 20 minutes light green, intensity 3, two lights together bright blue. (Intensity status audio broadcast:
massager off/massager low /massager medium/massager high) Mode switching --CONSTANT-PULSE-WAVE Massage motor mode adjustment, after the massager has been started, press this button, the working massage motor will enter the "PULSE" mode, press the button again, the massage motor will enter the "WAVE" mode, press the button again, the massage motor will enter the "CONSTANT" mode, and then cycle. The CONSTANT buzzer will sound once, the PULSE buzzer will sound twice, the WAVE buzzer will sound three times, and the current intensity color will also be displayed (audio real-time broadcast status: massager off, Massager OFF, massager mode one/ massager mode two/massager mode three) Massager mode one/ Massager mode two/ Massager mode three) Mode switching --CONSTANT-PULSE-WAVE Massage motor mode adjustment, after the massager has been started, press this button, the working massage motor will enter the "PULSE" mode, press the button again, the massage motor will enter the "WAVE" mode, press the button again, the massage motor will enter the "CONSTANT" mode, and then cycle. The CONSTANT buzzer will sound once, the PULSE buzzer will sound twice, the WAVE buzzer will sound three times, and the current intensity color will also be displayed (audio real-time broadcast status: massager off, Massager OFF, massager mode one/ massager mode two/massager mode three) Massager mode one/ Massager mode two/ Massager mode three) 19 20 21
*** Pay attention ***
During the motor operation, the music vibrates in the follow-up and vibration mode, the vibration is weakened, the third gear is reduced to the second gear (the second gear and the first gear are unchanged), and the motor stops and then resumes the third gear
(the volume does not drop). Coding method:
[Remote control head rise + foot rise + control box code key] Buzzer sounds, indicating successful code
* The control box has a reset function for the code key (the remote control enters the sleep state and is disconnected from the control box)
* The control box is powered on and reset, all motors are reset at the same time, and the reset process cannot be interrupted by any key 4
Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 5
| various | Users Manual | 183.83 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
Remote control key diagram Remote control function description Key label 1 2 3 Feature UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Hold down the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press ZG /SNORE/M1 within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sound, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold the flashlight +LOCK (lock) for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight +FLAT for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes three times, the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the continuous press mode, release the key and stop the motor. Key lock function: Long press the key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, 1 then the remote control key is unavailable, press the key other than the lock key, the backlight flashes 3 times;
Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. Run the motor to the ZG position (with initial value) first run the head and foot motor, and then run the external drag motor Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press ZG within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager and light bar status to ZG. (Power off does not clear) Motor one-click operation to M1 position (with initial value) First run the head and foot motor, then run the external drag motor Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press M1 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to M1. (Power off does not clear) Run the motor to the SNORE position with one key (with initial value). When the one-key release mode is used, flatten and close the massager after 15min. Press any key to exit the timing. Continuous press mode no timing. Run the head and foot motor first, and run the external towing motor Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SNORE within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SNORE.
(Power off does not clear) PILLOW rise: Hold down this key, PILLOW motor begins to rise, release this key, PILLOW motor rise stops PILLOW drop: Hold down this key, PILLOW motor began to fall, release this key, PILLOW motor drop stop Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 LUMBAR rise: Hold down this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor stops rising LUMBAR decline: Hold down this key, the LUMBAR motor begins to decline, release this key, the LUMBAR motor decline stops FLAT one-button reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, and keep the lamp under the bed in the state before pressing the button (power-on without reset) If the head massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium - > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. Reduce the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, when the lowest strength is reached, press the massager again to close. If the massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the foot massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium - > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. Reduce the strength of the foot massager by 3, and press the massager again to close when it reaches the lowest strength. Run the motor to M2 position with one key (with initial value) First run the head and foot motor, and then run the external drag motor Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press M2 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to M2. (Power off does not clear) Mode switching: CONSTANT- Low speed WAVE- Medium speed WAVE- high speed WAVE Press and hold for 5s to turn off the massager. The intensity remained unchanged after the mode was switched 3 Coding method:
Keep pressing the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding mode:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Note:
Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 4
| various | Users Manual | 163.36 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
Remote control key diagram Remote control function description Key label 1 2 Feature UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Hold down the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE/M1 within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sound, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold the flashlight +LOCK (lock) for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight +FLAT for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes three times, the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the 1 continuous press mode, release the key and stop the motor. Key lock function: Long press the key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, then the remote control key is unavailable, press the key other than the lock key, the backlight flashes 3 times;
Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. The motor runs to the ZG position (with initial value) with one click. Run the head and foot motor first, and run the external towing motor. Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press ZG within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager and light bar status to ZG. (Power off does not clear) The motor runs to M1 position (with initial value) with one click. Run the head and foot motor first, and run the external towing motor. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press M1 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to M1. (Power off does not clear) Run the motor to the SNORE position with one key (with initial value). When the one-key release mode is used, flatten and close the massager after 15min. Press any key to exit the timing. Continuous press mode no timing. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SNORE within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SNORE.
(Power off does not clear) Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop LUMBAR rise: Hold down this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor stops rising LUMBAR decline: Hold down this key, the LUMBAR motor 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 begins to decline, release this key, the LUMBAR motor decline stops FLAT one-button reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, and keep the lamp under the bed in the state before pressing the button (no reset on power-on If the head massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium - > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. Reduce the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, when the lowest strength is reached, press the massager again to close. If the massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the foot massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium - > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. Reduce the strength of the foot massager by 3, and press the massager again to close when it reaches the lowest strength The motor runs to M2 position with one key (with initial value). Run the head and foot motor first, and run the external towing motor. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press M2 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to M2. (Power off does not clear) Mode switching: CONSTANT- Low speed WAVE- Medium speed WAVE- high speed WAVE Press and hold for 5s to turn off the massager. The intensity remained unchanged after the mode was switched. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 3 Coding method:
Keep pressing the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding mode:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Note:
Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 4 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 5
| various | Users Manual | 184.05 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
HJSR81C Ble Remote control key diagram Remote control function description HJSR81C Ble Key label 1 2 Feature UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Hold down the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE/M1 within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sound, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold the flashlight +LOCK (lock) for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight +FLAT for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes three times, the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 continuous press mode, release the key and stop the motor. Key lock function: Long press the key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, then the remote control key is unavailable, press the key other than the lock key, the backlight flashes 3 times
(power off and then power on to keep the lock state) Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. Motor one-click operation to ZG position (with initial value) Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press ZG within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager and light bar status to ZG. (Power off does not clear) Motor one-click run to M1 position (with initial value) Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press M1 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to M1. (Power off does not clear) Run the motor to the SNORE position with one key (with initial value). When the one-key release mode is used, flatten and close the massager after 15min. Press any key to exit the timing. Continuous press mode no timing. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SNORE within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SNORE.
(Power off does not clear) Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop If the head massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium - > high, the 2 default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. Reduce the strength of the head massager, 3 strengths, when the lowest strength is reached, press the massager again to close. FLAT one-button reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, and keep the lamp under the bed in the state before pressing the button (power-on without reset) Mode switching: CONSTANT- Low speed WAVE- Medium speed WAVE- high speed WAVE Press and hold for 5s to turn off the massager. The intensity remained unchanged after the mode was switched. If the massager is not opened, press the button to open the massager, the massager is the last closed state by default, if the massager is opened, press the button to increase the strength of the foot massager, 3 strengths, in the order of: low - > medium - > high, the default time is 15 minutes, and the operation continues when the highest strength is reached. Reduce the strength of the foot massager by 3, and press the massager again to close when it reaches the lowest strength. 12 13 14 15 16 Coding method:
Keep pressing the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding mode:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Note:
Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function 3 Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 4
| various | Users Manual | 144.73 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
HJSR81D Ble Remote control key diagram Remote control function description Key label 1 2 3 Feature UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Hold down the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE/M1 within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sound, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold the flashlight +LOCK (lock) for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight +FLAT for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes three times, the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the continuous press mode, release the key and stop the motor. Key lock function: Long press the key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, 1 then the remote control key is unavailable, press the key other than the lock key, the backlight flashes 3 times
(power off and then power on to keep the lock state) Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. Motor one-click operation to ZG position (with initial value) Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press ZG within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager and light bar status to ZG. (Power off does not clear) Motor one-click run to M1 position (with initial value) Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press M1 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to M1. (Power off does not clear) Run the motor to the SNORE position with one key (with initial value). When the one-key release mode is used, flatten and close the massager after 15min. Press any key to exit the timing. Continuous press mode no timing. Multiplexing function: Hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SNORE within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SNORE.
(Power off does not clear) Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop FLAT one-button reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, and keep the lamp under the bed in the state before pressing the button (power-on without reset) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Coding method:
Keep pressing the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding mode:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Note:
Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 3 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 4
| various | Users Manual | 131.62 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
HJSR81E Ble Remote control key diagram Remote control function description Key label Feature 1 2 Motor one-click operation to ZG position (with initial value) Multiplex function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press ZG within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position, massager and light bar status to ZG. (Power off does not clear) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function:
Hold down the button for 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press ZG within 2s, the buzzer
"beep" sound, you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. Hold the flashlight +LOCK (lock) for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-button 1 release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time Press and hold the flashlight +FLAT for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes three times, the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the continuous press mode, release the key and stop the motor. Key lock function: Long press the key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, then the remote control key is unavailable, press the key other than the lock key, the backlight flashes 3 times
(power off and then power on to keep the lock state) Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop FLAT one-button reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position, turn off the massager, and keep the lamp under the bed in the state before pressing the button (power-on without reset) 3 4 5 6 7 8 Coding method:
Keep pressing the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of the remote control until the buzzer sounds and the backlight blinks, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Decoding mode:
[remote control head up + foot down] The backlight flashes, indicating successful decoding
* The control box has no reset function for code keys Note:
Press any key over 50s, the remote control will enter sleep, release and press again to restore the function 2 Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 3
| various | Users Manual | 121.70 KiB | October 10 2023 / April 08 2024 | delayed release |
System User Manual VersionChangeLogs Version
ChangeDate
BriefDescription
Remarks
V1.0 InitialRelease 2
Conventionalfunctions
ModelT87-L-2-S-XX inputvoltageDC5V
3
Power on the voice box, use the wake-up word to wake up the voice box, and then pair it with the control box. After successful pairing, say the command to achieve independent lifting and lowering adjustment of the motor areas on the back, legs, neck, and waist, as well as intensity adjustment of the massage area. The lights can be turned on and off, and it supports linkage with the control box, providing intelligent control functions Power on the voice box, wake it up using the wake word, then pair it with the control box. After successful pairing, issue voice commands to independently adjust the height of the back and legs, neck, and waist motor areas, control the intensity of the massager area, and enable linkage with the control box to provide intelligent posture control functionality. 4
Function Type Voice Control T87 Voice Control Box - Voice Commands Voice Commands Broadcast Phrases SMART-BED hello Smart Bed Connect okSearching for connectable devices volume up VOICE-UP INCREASE-VOLUME VOLUME-DOWN VOICE-DOWN DECREASE-VOLUME SPEAK-LOWER DISABLE-VOICE-FUNCTION TURN-OFF-SPEECH-MODE SPEECH-MODE-OFF SEE-YOU-LATER Name my Device Paired successfully ok volume up The volume is already at maximum ok volume down The volume is already at minimum okey,voice is turned off Please speak the custom wake word in a quiet environment Device Naming Complete OK REMOVE THE WAKE WORD OKCustom wake word has been deleted Motor Control Raise head/
Raise back okRaise head/
okRaise back 5
Lower head/
Lower back Raise foot/
Raise leg Lower foot/
Lower leg NECK-RISE NECK-DOWN Raise lumbar Lower lumbar All stop/Pause/Stop Running ALL-FLAT Good night FLAT bed Flat Preset TV-time/
TV preset okLower head/
okLower back okRaise foot/
okRaise leg okLower foot/
okLower leg okneck-rise okneck-down okRaise lumbar okLower lumbar okAll stop okPause okStop Running ok,ALL-FLAT okGood night okFLAT bed okFlat Preset okTV-time okTV preset Lounge preset okLounge preset Zero G/
Zero gravity okZero G/
okZero gravity Anti-snore okAnti-snore Open Anti-snore function OK, turning on the anti-snore function Shut Anti-snore function OK, turning off the anti-snore function Reading preset okReading preset wake up okwake up 6
Yoga-preset okYoga-preset Sleep mode okSleep mode Position one okPosition one Position two okPosition two Position Three okPosition Three Set position one okSet position one Set position two okSet position two Set position three okSet position three HEAD-MASSAGE-WORK okhead massage work HEAD-MASSAGE-RISE okhead massage rise HEAD-MASSAGE-DOWN okhead massage down HEAD-MASSAGE-STOP okhead massage stop FOOT-MASSAGE-WORK okfoot massage work FOOT-MASSAGE-RISE okfoot massage rise FOOT-MASSAGE-DOWN okfoot massage down FOOT-MASSAGE-STOP okfoot massage stop Turn on the massage okTurn on the massage Turn off the massage okTurn off the massage SWITCH-MODES okswitch modes Massage mode one okMassage mode one Massage mode two okMassage mode two Massage mode three okMassage mode three Massager Control Lighting Turn on light okTurn on light Control Turn off light okTurn off light 7
FCC Warning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generate, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 8
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body.
| various | Users Manual | 283.58 KiB | July 27 2026 |
Product function manual Smart home HJSR69G Ble Remote control button map Remote control function description The motor runs to the SLEEP-1 position (with initial value) with one key. Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SLEEP-1 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SLEEP-1. (Power off does not clear) Function description:
1. Feet down + head down, feet first 2. Feet up + head up, head up first 3. Feet down + head up, move together 4. Feet up + head down, move together Note: If there is an external motor, after the head and foot motor run to the position, the external motor will run at the same time There are two priorities when the position is fixed:
foot drop and head rise to high priority, and foot rise and head fall to low priority. Key lock function: Long press this key for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control key, then the remote control key is unavailable; After locking, press any key (except the lock), and the backlight flashes 3 times Press the button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control button, then the remote control button can be used. UBL: Underbed light on/off (steady on) The motor runs to the SLEEP-2 position (with initial value) with one key. Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight flashes, press SLEEP-2 within 2s, the buzzer rings 3 times, and record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SLEEP-2. (Power off does not clear) Function description:
1. Feet down + head down, feet first 2. Feet up + head up, head up first 1 2 3 4 3. Feet down + head up, move together 4. Feet up + head down, move together Note: If there is an external motor, after the head and foot motor run to the position, the external motor will run at the same time There are two priorities when the position is fixed:
foot drop and head rise to high priority, and foot rise and head fall to low priority. Run the motor to the position of SLEEP-3 with one key
(with initial value), and run to FLAT-2 after 15min in one-key release mode, and close the massager. Press any key to exit the timing; Continuous press mode no timing. Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press SLEEP-3 within 2s, and the buzzer rings 3 times to record the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar to SLEEP-3. (Power off does not clear) Function description:
1. Feet down + head down, feet first 2. Feet up + head up, head up first 3. Feet down + head up, move together 4. Feet up + head down, move together Note: If there is an external motor, after the head and foot motor run to the position, the external motor will run at the same time There are two priorities when the position is fixed:
foot drop and head rise to high priority, and foot rise and head fall to low priority. Back rise: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to rise, release this key, the back motor stops rising Leg rise: Hold down this key, the leg motor starts to rise, release this key, the leg motor stops rising Maximum operation up to 42.5mm, independent of motor travel Back down: Hold down this key, the back motor starts to fall, release this key, the back motor drop stops Leg drop: Hold down this key, leg motor start to drop, release this key, leg motor drop stop Flashlight on/off (default 30s). Reuse function:
Hold down the button 5s, the backlight flashes, enter the memorizable mode, press SLEEP-1/SLEEP-
2/SLEEP-3/FLAT-2 within 2s, the buzzer "beep" sound, 5 6 7 8 9 10 you can remember the current motor position and the status of the massager and the light bar. (FLAT-2 no memory massager and light strip) Hold the flashlight +LOCK (lock) for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes twice, and the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the one-
button release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight +FLAT for about 3s at the same time, the backlight flashes three times, the keys in all positions of the remote control enter the continuous press mode, release the key and stop the motor. Flat-2: One-click motor operation to the FLAT 2 position, turn off the bed light, turn off the massager
(with initial value) Multiplexing function: Press and hold the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight blinks, press FLAT 2 within 2s, and the buzzer rings 3 times to record the current motor position to FLAT 2 (do not remember the underbed light and massager). (Power off does not clear) 1. Feet down + head down, feet first 2. Feet up + head up, head up first 3. Feet down + head up, move together 4. Feet up + head down, move together 11
(Default function) Code matching mode:
Single control box/single remote control: keep pressing the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head drop and foot lift buttons of the remote control until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes, indicating that the code alignment is successful. Single control box to double remote control: continue to press the head lift and foot drop buttons until the backlight flashes, clear the remote control code information; Power on the control box again, and the control box will be in the code alignment state within 60 seconds. Keep pressing the head drop and foot lift buttons of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes, indicating that remote control 1 is successfully code alignment. Do not press any button of remote control 1, continue to press the head down and foot up buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer sound and the backlight flashes, indicating that the two codes of remote control are successful. When the two remote controls switch control, you need to wait for the former remote control to disconnect the Bluetooth connection and the latter remote control to control. Dual control box to dual remote control: Use the "single control box/single remote control" instructions to pair system 1. Use
"Single control box/single remote" to specify pairing system 2. Unplug systems 1 and 2. Connect the two systems using a synchronization line. Power on system 1 and system 2. Now, the two beds will run in synchronous mode. Attention:
1. After 60 seconds, the control box can be powered on by pressing the code alignment key to enable the code alignment. The buzzer enters the code alignment state after three sounds 2. The backlight of the remote control is directly off after 5 seconds of no operation. After about 6 seconds, the remote control enters sleep and the Bluetooth connection is disconnected. 3.***** When the controller box is powered on for the first time or is powered off unexpectedly, manually reset the controller box and then use *****
Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
| various | Users Manual | 215.20 KiB | April 22 2025 |
Product Name: Smart Standing Desk Control Box Product Model: HJC32L Series Document Version: V1.0 Release Date: January 22, 2026 Prepared By: R&D Department Reviewed / Approved:
1. Document Revision History Version Date Changes Author Reviewer V1.0 2026-01-22 Initial release 2. Product Overview 2.1 Product Introduction This product is an intelligent control box specifically designed for electric standing desks. It is suitable for ergonomic height-adjustment applications including office technical workstations, kitchen systems, desks, workstations, control consoles, medical workstations, and similar environments. The product drives electric lifting columns/actuators to achieve smooth and stable desk height adjustment, equipped with soft start/stop, intelligent anti-collision, height memory, overload protection, and other features, providing users with a safe, efficient, and healthy workspace solution. Core Values:
Supports ergonomic sit-stand working, relieving muscle fatigue and health risks associated with prolonged sitting Precise height control with smooth and stable lifting operation and low noise Multiple safety protections to ensure user and equipment safety Ultra-low standby power consumption, compliant with green energy-saving requirements 2.2 Application Scope Smart office desks Technical / industrial workstations Control consoles and media mounts Home office standing desks Electric adjustable counters / kitchen systems Height-adjustable workbenches (assembly tables, inspection tables) 2.3 Product Appearance Product appearance image:
3. Product Features 3.1 Core Functions This product provides the following core functions:
Lifting Control: Precisely controls desk upward and downward movement with smooth operation. Capable of driving 2 lifting columns. Synchronized Driving: Ensures all lifting columns in a multi-column system maintain height synchronization. The system guarantees zero height deviation after 10,000 operating cycles. With a high-performance controller, speed can reach 30 mm/s. Anti-Collision Detection (Intelligent Obstacle Reversal): Built-in collision sensing detects resistance during lifting and automatically reverses a certain distance to prevent damage to equipment or objects caused by external forces. An optional gyroscope enhances collision detection accuracy, achieving 5 kg high-precision collision protection. Child Lock Function: Locks handheld controller operations to prevent accidental activation by children. Overload Protection (EOP): Independent current limiting provides overload protection. Motors automatically stop under overload or stall conditions, protecting the drive and control box. Tilt and Imbalance Protection: When the device tilts beyond a set threshold due to uneven flooring or uneven load distribution, the system automatically stops operation or triggers an alarm. Left-right imbalance protection is included. Soft Start / Soft Stop: Lifting speed gradually ramps up and down during start and stop, avoiding impact and shaking to ensure desk stability. Current / Thermal Overload Protection: MOSFET-based design with real-
time current monitoring automatically switches to intermittent operation mode after 2 minutes of continuous use, effectively preventing overheating. Emergency Stop: Supports emergency stop function to immediately interrupt all actions in hazardous situations, ensuring personal safety. Overheat Protection: Built-in temperature sensor automatically stops output when internal temperature exceeds the safety threshold; operation resumes after cooling. Smart Connectivity and Interaction:
Bluetooth Connection: Wireless control of the standing desk via smartphone app USB Charging: Supports USB charging for mobile devices External Battery: Supports connection to a rechargeable external battery, enabling operation without mains power 3.2 Hand Controller Features The matching hand controller supports height memory function. Users can set up to
[3] memory positions (commonly used heights for sitting/standing), enabling one-
touch height adjustment. It supports LED/LCD display for real-time height display
(switchable between cm and inches), with the display automatically turning off when not in use to reduce power consumption. Some hand controllers also support initialization settings, error code display, child lock, and sedentary alert functions. 4. Technical Specifications 4.1 Hardware Specifications Item Number of Channels Connectable Lifting Columns Built-in Gyroscope Housing Material Color Specification Up to 3 channels 3 1 ABS Black 4.2 Electrical Parameters Item Specification Rated Input Voltage AC 100-240V, 50/60Hz / DC 24V Plug Type Output Channels Transformer Type EU / US / AU / UK / JP, etc. 3 channels Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS) Backup Battery Interface Supports external battery Protection Functions Over-current, temperature, limiting overload protection (EOP) over-voltage, independent over-
current Interface Specifications:
Interface Type Quantity Specification Motor Output Power Input Hand Controller 3 1 1 Bluetooth Optional DC 32V, 8A per channel 100-240V AC input Communication control signals and Smartphone app control
(optional) 4.3 Interface Definition Refer to the interface diagram in Section 2.3 for pin definitions. 4.4 Software Specifications Item Specification Anti-Collision Sensitivity Adjustment Adjustable via hand controller Height Limit Setting upper/lower Supports limit settings to prevent exceeding safe range travel System Lock Supports child lock function Initialization / Learning Automatic travel learning and reset Error Code Display Software Upgrade Supports multiple error troubleshooting codes for Supports firmware upgrade via PC software 4.5 Performance Parameters Item Specification Operating Noise Rated Load 50 dB 1000N-1500N (per column) / 100 kg
(desktop) Lifting Speed 25-40 mm/s (under load) Synchronization Accuracy
<1 mm (multi-column synchronized operation) Protection Class Class II 5. Operating Environment and Reliability 5.1 Environmental Conditions Item Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Altitude Specification
+5C to +45C
-20C to +60C 95% non-condensing Normal atmospheric pressure Atmospheric Pressure 700-1060 hPa 5.2 Protection Features Item Over-Current Protection Over-Voltage Protection Specification Supported limiting)
(independent current Supported (automatic shutdown when input voltage exceeds threshold) Over-Temperature Protection Supported Overload Protection Supported (EOP overload protection, independent per current channel) limiting ESD Protection Compliant with IEC standards 6. Dimensions and Installation 6.1 Dimensional Drawing Item Total Length (L) Dimension (mm) 246.5 Total Width (W) Total Height (H) 96 48.5 Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
| various | Users Manual | 123.48 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Product Proposals Title of the proposal KS1086_0049 Areas of use electric bed Certification Requirements N/A of Overview special requirements of Type product used Country or region of use stay at home (unemployed) United States of America person demand on Meng Zhaodong Project Manager Friendship Wang Test Engineer Tai Yanqin
(1913-1996), Chinese poet Date of submission of proposals 2022/12/13 release V1.0 V1.1 V1.5 V1.6 v1.7 Date (of issue) N/A N/A 2022/12/22 2023.9.21 2024.1.13 release V1.8 V1.9 v2.0 v2.1 v2.2 Date (of issue) 2024.4.7 2024.4.25 2024.5.10 2024.6.7 2024.7.8 1 release V2.3 V2.4 Date (of issue) 2024.7.17 2024.8.30 Note: This manual first temporarily uploaded to the shared disk, in case of changes in the middle of the demand, the loss of information, internal information to be confirmed by the customer in the use of the customer to remove this precaution before the use of v1.9 version of the manual to check!
Second, the remote control key h124/h301 h92e h92b SR95 SR81D Full-Featured Tooling Remote Control for Tests 2 SR69-004 3 III. Fixed positions old key value ZG HEAD (mm) FOOT (mm) 31 79 SNORE TV 18 0 114 46 M1 25 25 M2 FLAT 20 40 0 0 new key value HEAD
(mm) FOOT
(mm) SLEEP-1 ZG-2 SLEEP-3 SNORE-2 TV-2 SLEEP-2 M1-2 M2-2 FLAT-2 FLAT-3 SLEEP4 30 30 30 10 0 0 10 10 0 0 20 20 20 20 20 30 One control box can only be used for one type of remote control, and it is prohibited to use the same control box for both old and new code value remote controls. For interspersed testing, factory settings must be restored using the accompanying remote control (flashlight + LOCK) Fourth, the remote control function H124/H301 key labeling Functional Description 1 2 3 4 5 Head motor extends and releases to stop. The foot motor extends and releases to stop. The head motor retracts and releases to stop. The foot motor retracts and releases to stop. The motor runs to the M1 or MEN position (with initial values) with one touch. Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 or MEN within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current 4 motor position and massager, light bar status to M1 or MEN.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the M2 position with one click (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight button for 5 seconds, the backlight will flash and enter the memorizable mode, release the flashlight and press M1/M2/TV/ZG/SNORE within 2 seconds, the control box will "beep beep beep" and memorize the current position (back and leg motors, light belt, massager mode/intensity, etc.), if you don't press M1 or M2 within 2 seconds, it will exit the editing memory position mode; and if you don't press M1 or M2 within 2 seconds, it will exit the editing memory position mode. If M1 or M2 is not pressed within 2 seconds, it will exit the editing and memorizing position mode;
Reuse function: press and hold the FLAT+ flashlight at the same time for 3s, the backlight flashes 3 times to enter the continuous pressing mode, at this time, all the position buttons enter the continuous pressing mode, release the button motor to stop. Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight + M1 or MEN at the same time for about 3S, the backlight flashes twice, enter the one-touch release mode can reset the memory position of the memory key to the factory default setting at the same time. FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to the minimum travel position
(power-on does not reset).
(If the massager is switched on and off, turn off the massager; do not turn off the underbed light) Long press the remote control backlight for 5 seconds to flash 3 times to indicate that the remote control is locked (in the point of pressing the key other than the lock button, the backlight flashes 3 times to indicate this); long press the remote control backlight for 5 seconds to indicate that the remote control is unlocked. The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min timing in 5 6 7 8 9 10 Control box reserved function 11 Control box reserved function 12 Control box reserved function 13 Control box reserved function 14 Control box reserved function 15 Control box reserved function 16 Control box reserved function 17 Control box reserved function one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the TV position with one touch (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) lit. head and feet rise together head and feet together UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) Motor one-touch operation to M3 position (initial value 0) Reuse function: Long press the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight flashes, press M3 within 2s, the buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and light bar status to M3
(Power failure does not clear) Motor one-touch operation to M4 position (initial value 0) Reuse function: Long press the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight flashes, press M4 within 2s, the buzzer sounds 3 times, the current motor position and light bar status will be recorded to
(Power failure does not clear) Note: Press any button for more than 50s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. One-touch release mode chases synchronization, continuous press mode does not chase synchronization. Pair code method:
Single control box/single remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down
(1,4) buttons until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control code information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the code pairing state for 60 seconds, keep pressing the head up and foot down (2,3) buttons on the remote control and the buzzer will sound to indicate the code pairing has been successfully done. (The control box will exit from the code pairing state when any 6 button on the remote control which is already code pairing successfully is pressed). When pressing any key on the remote control that has been successfully programmed, the control box exits the programmed state.) Single control and pair of dual remote controls: keep pressing the head up and foot down (1,4) buttons until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control code information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the code pairing state for 60 seconds, keep pressing the head up and foot down (2,3) buttons on the remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer ringing, which indicates that the code pairing of the remote control 1 has been successful; don't press any of the buttons of the remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up (2,3) buttons of the remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer ringing, which indicates that the code pairing of the remote control 2 has been successful; when pressing any of the buttons on the two remote controls that have been code pairing successfully, it means that the remote control 2 has been code pairing successfully. Do not press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up (2,3) buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer, it means remote control 2 has been successfully coded; when you press any button of the two remote controls that have been successfully coded, the control box exits the coding state. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Note: 1, the control box can be powered on 60s after the code key to open the code, the buzzer sounded three times to enter the code state, the control box code key no reset function 1Remote control no operation for 5 seconds backlight directly off, about 6 seconds after the remote control into sleep at the same time bluetooth disconnect, press the button again bluetooth reconnect. 2When the control box is powered up for the first time or when the power is accidentally disconnected, please reset it before using it. Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box is connected to this control box Synchronized operation. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Split-top synchronization mode 1, at the same time press [remote control head down + foot down (3, 4)] backlight flashes, the buzzer triple beep into the Split-top synchronization mode, the head motor in this mode for the split-control mode, regardless of the head lift or memory position button corresponding to the head motor operation, the remote control can 7 only control its code successfully control box connected to the head of a single motor. 2. Press the [Remote Control Head Down + Foot Down (3,4)] buzzer again for a long beep, indicating that the Split-top synchronization mode is lifted. H92E key labeling 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Functional Description UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight button for 5 seconds, the backlight will flash and enter the memorizable mode, release the flashlight and press M1/M2/TV/ZG/SNORE within 2 seconds, the control box will "beep beep beep" and memorize the current position (back and leg motors, light belt, massager mode/intensity, etc.), if you don't press M1 or M2 within 2 seconds, it will exit the editing memory position mode;
and if you don't press M1 or M2 within 2 seconds, it will exit the editing memory position mode. If M1 or M2 is not pressed within 2 seconds, it will exit the editing and memorizing position mode;
Reuse function: press and hold the FLAT+ flashlight at the same time for 3s, the backlight flashes 3 times to enter the continuous pressing mode, at this time, all the position buttons enter the continuous pressing mode, release the button motor to stop. Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight + lock key at the same time for about 3S, the backlight flashes twice to enter the one-key release mode, at this time, all position keys enter the one-key release pressure mode, can be reset at the same time the memory location of the memory key to the factory default settings Long press the remote control for 5 seconds, the backlight of the remote control will flash 3 times to indicate that the remote control is locked
(in the case of pressing buttons other than the lock button, the backlight of the remote control will flash 3 times to indicate that the remote control is unlocked); Long press the remote control again for 5 seconds, the backlight of the remote control will flash 3 times to indicate that the remote control is unlocked. Head motor extends and releases to stop. The head motor retracts and releases to stop. The foot motor extends and releases to stop. The foot motor retracts and releases to stop. Head and feet rise together, release to stop. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Control box reserved function 15 Control box reserved function 16 Control box reserved function 17 Control box reserved function Head and feet descend together and release to stop. The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min of timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the M1 or MEN position (with initial values) with one touch. Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 or MEN within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1 or MEN.(power off does not clear) FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to the minimum travel position
(power-on does not reset).
(If massager is on, turn off massager; do not turn off underbed light) The motor runs to the M2 position with one click (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the TV position with one touch (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) Motor one-touch operation to M3 position (initial value 0) Reuse function: Long press the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight flashes, press M3 within 2s, the buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and light bar status to M3
(Power failure does not clear) Motor one-touch operation to M4 position (initial value 0) Reuse function: Long press the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight flashes, press M4 within 2s, the buzzer sounds 3 times, the current motor position and light bar status will be recorded to
(Power failure does not clear) 9 Note: Press any button for more than 50s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. One-touch release mode chases synchronization, continuous press mode does not chase synchronization. Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: continuously press the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the pairing state for 60 seconds, continuously press the head down+ foot up button of the remote control the buzzer sounds to indicate the pairing is successful (the control box exits from the pairing state when any button on the remote control which has already been pairing successfully is pressed). Single control and pair of dual remote controls: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the pairing state for 60 seconds, keep pressing the head down+ foot up button of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer ringing, indicating that the pairing of remote control 1 has been successfully done; don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down+ foot up button of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer ringing, indicating that the pairing of remote control 2 has been successfully done;
when pressing any button of the 2 remote controls that have been successfully pairing, the control box exits from the pairing state. Don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head up button of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer, it means that remote control 2 has been successfully coded; when you press any button of remote control 2 that has been successfully coded, the control box exits the coding state. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Note: 1, the control box can be powered on 60s after the code key to open the code, the buzzer sounded three times to enter the code state, the control box code key no reset function 1, the remote control no operation for 5 seconds backlight directly out, about 6 seconds after the remote control into hibernation at the same time bluetooth disconnect, press the button again bluetooth reconnect. 2. When the control box is powered up for the first time or when the power is cut off accidentally, please reset it before using it. Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box is connected to this control box Synchronized operation. 10 When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Split-top synchronization mode 1, at the same time press Remote control head down + foot down backlight flashes, buzzer triple sound into the Split-top synchronization mode, the head motor in this mode for the split-control mode, no matter the head lift or memory position button corresponding to the head motor operation, the remote control can only control its code successful control box connected to the head of a single motor. 2. Press the [Remote Control Head Down + Foot Down] buzzer again for a long beep, indicating that the Split-top synchronization mode is lifted. H92B key labeling Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Reuse function: press and hold the FLAT+ flashlight at the same time for 3s, the backlight flashes 3 times to enter the continuous pressing mode, at this time, all the position buttons enter the continuous pressing mode, release the button motor to stop. Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight + lock key at the same time for about 3S, the backlight flashes twice to enter the one-key release mode, at this time, all position keys enter the one-key release pressure mode, can be reset at the same time the memory location of the memory key to the factory default settings Head motor extends, releases to stop. The head motor retracts and releases to stop. The foot motor extends and releases to stop. The foot motor retracts and releases to stop. Long press the remote control backlight for 5 seconds to flash 3 times to indicate that the remote control is locked (in the point of pressing the key other than the lock button, the backlight flashes 3 times to indicate this); long press the remote control backlight for 5 seconds to indicate that the remote control is unlocked. FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to the minimum travel position
(power-on does not reset).
(If massager is on, turn off massager; do not turn off underbed light) The motor runs to the M1 or MEN position (with initial values) with one touch. Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 or MEN within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Control box reserved 11 function position and massager, light bar status to M1 or MEN.(power off does not clear) 9 Control box reserved function 10 Control box reserved function 11 Control box reserved function 12 Control box reserved function 13 Control box reserved function 14 Control box reserved function 15 Control box reserved function 16 Control The motor runs to the M2 position with one click (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the TV position with one touch (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) Head and feet rise together, release to stop. Head and feet descend together and release to stop. UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) Motor one-touch operation to M3 position (initial value 0) Reuse function: Long press the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight 12 flashes, press M3 within 2s, the buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and light bar status to M3
(Power failure does not clear) Motor one-touch operation to M4 position (initial value 0) Reuse function: Long press the flashlight for about 5s, the backlight flashes, press M4 within 2s, the buzzer sounds 3 times, the current motor position and light bar status will be recorded to
(Power failure does not clear) box reserved function 17 Control box reserved function Note: Press any button for more than 50s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. One-touch release mode chases synchronization, continuous press mode does not chase synchronization. Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: continuously press the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the pairing state for 60 seconds, continuously press the head down+ foot up button of the remote control the buzzer sounds to indicate the pairing is successful (the control box exits from the pairing state when any button on the remote control which has already been pairing successfully is pressed). Single control and pair of dual remote controls: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the pairing state for 60 seconds, keep pressing the head down+ foot up button of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer ringing, indicating that the pairing of remote control 1 has been successfully done; don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down+ foot up button of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer ringing, indicating that the pairing of remote control 2 has been successfully done;
when pressing any button of the 2 remote controls that have been successfully pairing, the control box exits from the pairing state. Don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head up button of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer, it means that remote control 2 has been successfully coded; when you press any button of remote control 2 that has been successfully coded, the control box exits the coding state. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Note: 1, the control box can be powered on 60s after the code key to open the code, the buzzer sounded three times to enter the code state, the control box code key no reset function 1, the remote control no operation for 5 seconds backlight directly out, about 6 seconds after the remote control into hibernation at the same time bluetooth 13 disconnect, press the button again bluetooth reconnect. 2. When the control box is powered up for the first time or when the power is cut off accidentally, please reset it before using it. Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box is connected to this control box Synchronized operation. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Split-top synchronization mode 1, at the same time press Remote control head down + foot down backlight flashes, buzzer triple sound into the Split-top synchronization mode, the head motor in this mode for the split-control mode, no matter the head lift or memory position button corresponding to the head motor operation, the remote control can only control its code successful control box connected to the head of a single motor. 2. Press the [Remote Control Head Down + Foot Down] buzzer again for a long beep, indicating that the Split-top synchronization mode is lifted. SR95 key labeling 1 2 3 Underbed light: press this button to turn on the underbed light; press this button again to turn off the underbed light. Flashlight: Tap this button to turn on the flashlight (automatically turn off after 30S), tap this button again to turn off the flashlight in the on state. The flashlight status is displayed in real time on the status bar
,no icon is displayed when the flashlight is off. Lock: When the remote control functions are not locked, press this key in any interface, according to the prompts in the pop-up window, "YES"
is selected by default, press OK key to execute "YES", then all the functions of the remote control will be locked and return to the main interface. The status bar will display the lock icon, which will be canceled automatically after 2S. Operate the remote control in locked status, the screen pop-up window will prompt the unlock mode, and the pop-up window will be canceled automatically after 15S. (After locking, power off and on again, it will remain locked) Locked:
1. When the screen goes off:
14 Press and hold any of the buttons (except the LOCK button), the lock symbol will appear for about 1 second, then a text message will appear with instructions on how to unlock it 2. when the screen is on:
Pressing and holding any button (except the LOCK button) displays a text message indicating how to unlock it. Unlock: press and hold this key for 5S when the remote control is locked, all functions of the remote control will be unlocked, and the unlock icon will pop-up in the screen, and the pop-up window will be canceled automatically after 2S, and the interface at this time will be the main interface; (the interface after the remote control is locked and unlocked will be the main interface) 1. When the screen is off: Press and hold the LOCK button for 7 seconds to unlock the remote control. 2. When the screen is on: press and hold the LOCK button for 5 seconds to unlock the remote control. Up\Motor Up Button: Tap this button to move the preselection box upward from its current position. The main interface controls the motor to rise, press and hold the button, the motor extends, release to stop. Left button: Tap this button to move the preselection box to the left of the current position. OK button: Press this button to confirm the execution of the current preselected function. Right button:Tap this button to move the cursor to the right of the current position. Downward \Motor Down Button:Tap this button to move the cursor downward to the current position. The main interface controls the motor descent, press and hold the button, the motor retracts, release to stop. Press this key to prompt the pop-up window that this bed set has no massager function, press OK to exit the pop-up window immediately and return to the original interface, and the pop-up window will be canceled automatically after 15s of no operation (no massager function). 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Tap this key from any screen to enter the main drive control screen. 11 Tap this key in any screen to go to the setting screen of the memorized position;
Tap the pre-selected box to reach the memorized position. Press and hold 5S to save the current position to the pre-selected mode, after successful saving, the pop-up window will prompt, 15S will cancel automatically, and press OK to cancel immediately (FLAT does not have 15 the function of long-press memory). Memory position memorizes the current motor position and massager and light bar status. I. The remote control will power on automatically and the screen will display the logo interface. Three seconds to five seconds will enter the motor selection interface, the user according to their own bed type to choose the number of motors and massager, can operate the upper and lower buttons for pre-selection (blue box), press OK to confirm the selection (blue solid dot). After the selection is completed, move the pre-selected box to the CONTINUE, press OK button, there will be a pop-up window prompts, (pop-up window will not be automatically canceled, you must perform YES \ NO) the customer according to the actual bed type to choose whether or not there is a massager. This set of equipment to choose the head and foot motor, no massager. Second, after the number of motors and massager selection is completed, the control box is powered on within 60S tap OK key for pairing with the control box (if the control box is powered on for more than 60S, first press the code pairing key, the buzzer will sound three times, and then press OK key for pairing with the control box). After entering the main interface, it means the code pairing is successful.
(If the remote control has been paired with the control box automatically after power on, it will enter the main interface automatically after the customer logo interface) In the main interface, press the remote control "OK" button to enter the main menu interface. 1. The first function is FAVORITES, which is consistent with the function of the 11 button. 2, the second function for the time setting, tap the OK button after the pre-selected box position to reach the hour of the icon position, tap the up or down button to adjust the clock number (press the up button, the up arrow becomes darker, let go of lighter; press the down button, the down arrow becomes darker, let go of lighter), the 12-hour system, the 01-12 cycle; hours of the digital adjustments are completed, tap the right button, adjust the pre-selected box position Reach the minute icon position, tap up or down button to adjust clock digits (press up button, up arrow turns darker, release to lighten; press down button, down arrow turns darker, release to lighten), (00-59 cycle). After the time setting is completed, continue to tap the right button, you can move the dark blue check box to select AM or PM by pressing up and down buttons.Press OK button, the pop-up window displays the check mark (2S disappears automatically) while updating the time in the status bar; go back to the previous level of the interface (main menu). 3. The third interface is the setting interface.
(1) Execute the Erase All Favoirtes operation and operate according to the pop-up window, YES to execute the operation and cancel the pop-up window, NO to cancel the pop-up 16 window; YES to confirm that all the information in the memorized locations will be erased after executing this operation.
(2) Execute the Articulations operation and operate according to the popup window, YES to execute the operation and cancel the popup window, NO to cancel the popup window;
YES to confirm that after executing this operation, it will go back to the page selected by the motor, redefine the bed type, and re-match the UI interface.
(3) Execute the Un-Pairing Process operation and operate according to the pop-up window, YES to execute the operation and cancel the pop-up window, NO to cancel the pop-up window; YES to confirm that after executing this operation, the connection between the remote control and the control box will be disconnected, and at the same time, return to the customer's LOGO interface, and re-select the bed type.
(4) Execute Press & Release Mode operation, operate according to the pop-up window, tap OK to execute the operation and cancel the pop-up window. If there is no operation after 15S, the pop-up window will be canceled automatically. Tap OK button to confirm switching to this mode, it will erase all the memories and restore the one-touch release mode (default mode of the remote control). The round icon in front of the option will change to dark color. At the same time, the round icon in front of the Press & Hold Mode option changes from dark blue to light gray;
(5) Performing Press & Hold Mode operation switches the remote control to Continuous Press Mode. The circular icon in front of this option changes from light gray to dark blue. At the same time, the circular icon in front of the Press & Release Mode option changes from dark blue to light gray
(6) After the implementation of the Brightness option, you can adjust the brightness of the remote control, through the up and down buttons to adjust, a total of three brightness, click the OK button to save and return to the upper level of the menu.
(7) When the About option is executed, it switches to the information about this remote control, tap the OK button to go back to the previous level. Note: Tap to operate the remote control for the first time after hibernation, only wake up, no function, wake up to the main interface. No operation 5thS Bluetooth disconnect. Remote control UI interface hibernation time crossed out is 15S hibernation, other is 5S hibernation. Please check the PDF file below for the specific interface SR81 key labeling SR81 function (new key value FLAT-2) 1 UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) 2 Flashlight on/off (default 30s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter into the memorizable mode, press SLEEP-1/SLEEP-2/SLEEP-3/FLAT-2 within 2s, the buzzer will be beeping to memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. (FLAT-2 17 does not memorize the massager and light bar) Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. Key lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight will flash 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available; after locking, press any button
(except lock), the backlight will flash 3 times. Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight blinks 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used. The motor runs to the SLEEP-1 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press SLEEP-1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SLEEP-1.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. The motor runs to the SLEEP-2 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press SLEEP-2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SLEEP-2.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. 18 3 4 5 There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. The motor runs to SLEEP-3 position with one key (with initial value), and runs to FLAT-2 and closes the massager after timing 15min in one key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; no timing in continuous pressing mode. Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press SLEEP-3 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SLEEP-3. (Power failure does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Maximum operation up to 42.5mm, independent of motor stroke Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops FLAT-2: motor one-touch operation to FLAT-2 position, without turning off the under-bed light, turning off the massager (with initial value) Reuse function: long press the flashlight for about 5s, backlight flashes, press FLAT-2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position to FLAT-2 (no memory of under-bed light, massager). (Power failure does not clear) 1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together FLAT3: FLAT + SLEEP 1, the backlight flashes once and the buzzer beeps briefly once, the motor runs to 0mm / 0mm first, then the head motor runs to 20mm first, and the foot motor runs to 20mm again; to realize the motor hall count reset function 6 7 8 9 10 13 key combinat ion
(Default Function) Note: Press any button for more than 60s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. 19
(Default function) Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in code pairing status in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of the remote control until you hear the buzzer ringing, and the backlight flashes to indicate the code pairing is successful. Single control box to dual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information;
re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the code pairing state in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 1 has been successful; don't press any buttons of remote control 1, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 2 has been successful. Don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight blinks, it means the remote control 2 is successful in code pairing, when switching between the two remote controls, you need to wait for the first one to disconnect from the bluetooth connection and then the second one can control it. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Attention:
1Control box can be opened by pressing the code key after powering up for 60s, the buzzer will ring three times to enter the code state, the control box code key has no reset function. 2Remote control no operation for 5 seconds backlight directly off, about 6 seconds after the remote control into sleep at the same time bluetooth disconnect, press the button again bluetooth reconnect. 3. ***** control box initial power up or accidental power failure, must be manually reset before using *****
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Logical Relationships:
1. Judgment when pressing the foot up and foot down buttons:
20 1.1. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) and above, the feet can run at any angle 1.2. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) ~ -5 degrees (10mm), the foot can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) and below.
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 1.3, head in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the foot can only run below the head position
(0-10mm) (eg: head position 7mm, foot position can only be 7mm) (over the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2. Judgment when pressing the head-up and head-down buttons:
2.1, feet at 0 degrees (20mm) or more, the head can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) or more (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2.2. When the foot is at 0 (20mm) to -5 degrees (10mm), the head can only run at
-5 degrees (10mm) and above
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 2.3, foot in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the head can only be in the foot position and above the operation (for example: foot position 7mm, the head position can only be 7mm operation) (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) key labeling Functions (old SR69 key values - full function program) 1 2 The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) Button lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available;
Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight blinks 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used. 3 UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min of timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the TV position with one touch (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) 4 5 21 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 The motor runs to the M1 position with one touch (with initial value). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) PILLOW RISE: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to rise, release this key, the PILLOW motor rises and stops. The motor runs to the M2 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) PILLOW DOWN: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to descend, release this key, the PILLOW motor descends and stops. Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and enter the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE//TV/M1/M2 within 2s, the buzzer will be beeping to memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and light bar. Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to minimum travel position, shut off massager (no reset on power-up) Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops LUMBAR RISE: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor rises and stops. LUMBAR DOWN: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to descend, release this key, the LUMBAR motor descends and stops. If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the 22 order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Turn on and off the massager: Tap this button to turn on the back and leg massager; tap this button again to turn off the back and leg massager. If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Lower the head massager intensity button, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. WAVE button: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between continuous-low wave-mid wave-high wave, 4 modes. Press and hold for approx. 5 seconds, the backlight flashes to turn off the massager Decrease the intensity of the foot massager for 3 intensities and press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. 19 20 21 22 23
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. When press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes and the buzzer "tick" "tick" "tick" enters the Split-top synchronization mode, in this mode the head motor is in split-control mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head up/down or memory position buttons is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to its control box successfully. In this mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head lift or memory position button is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with which it has successfully paired the code. Press the head-down and foot-down buttons again and the buzzer sounds a long beep to release the Split-top synchronization mode. key labeling 1 Functions (SR69 new key values - full function program) The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial 23 values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. Button lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available;
Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight blinks 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used. UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and runs to FLAT-2 and closes the massager after timing 15min in one key release mode, press any key to exit timing; no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. Motor one-touch operation to TV position (with initial values) Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 24 2 3 4 6 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. The motor runs to the M1 position with one touch (with initial value). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. PILLOW RISE: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to rise, release this key, the PILLOW motor rises and stops. The motor runs to the M2 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. PILLOW DOWN: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to descend, release this key, the PILLOW motor descends and stops. Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter press ZG-2/TV-2/SNORE-2/M1-2/M2-2/FLAT-2 within 2s, the buzzer will be beeping to memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. (FLAT-2 does not memorize the massager and memorizable mode, into the 25 6 7 8 9 10 11 light bar) Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Maximum operation up to 42.5mm, independent of motor stroke Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping FLAT-2: motor one-touch operation to FLAT-2 position, without turning off the under-bed light, turning off the massager (with initial value) Reuse function: long press the flashlight for about 5s, backlight flashes, press FLAT-2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position to FLAT-2 (no memory of under-bed light, massager). (Power failure does not clear) 1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops LUMBAR RISE: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor rises and stops. LUMBAR DOWN: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to descend, release this key, the LUMBAR motor descends and stops. If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Tap this button to turn on the back and leg massager;
Tap this button again to turn off the back and leg massager If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . 26 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Lower the head massager intensity button, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. WAVE button: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between continuous-low wave-mid wave-high wave, 4 modes. Press and hold for approx. 5 seconds, the backlight flashes to turn off the massager Decrease the intensity of the foot massager for 3 intensities and press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity.
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Logical Relationships:
1. Judgment when pressing the foot up and foot down buttons:
1.1. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) and above, the feet can run at any angle 1.2. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) ~ -5 degrees (10mm), the foot can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) and below.
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 1.3, head in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the foot can only run below the head position
(0-10mm) (eg: head position 7mm, foot position can only be 7mm) (over the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2. Judgment when pressing the head-up and head-down buttons:
2.1, feet at 0 degrees (20mm) or more, the head can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) or more (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2.2. When the foot is at 0 (20mm) to -5 degrees (10mm), the head can only run at
-5 degrees (10mm) and above
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 2.3, foot in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the head can only be in the foot position and above the operation (for example: foot position 7mm, the head position can only be 7mm operation) (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) Full-function remote control (SR69 A0-PCBA) New full-function remote control program 27 SR 69_new.hex Old full function remote control program key labeling SR69-004 Function 1 2 3 8 9 10 11 12 Motor one-touch operation to M1 position (with initial value) Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record all current motor position and massager intensity, mode, light bar or color strip color status to M1.(power off does not clear) Key lock function: long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control keys, press any key except its own remote control backlight flashes three times, this time the remote control keys are not available; long press this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control keys, this time the remote control keys can be used
(Power off and on, remote control stays locked) Regular underbed light:
Press the button to turn on the underbed light, press again to turn off the underbed light (default always on) UBL: Tap to turn on, then press to turn off, remote control has no color switching function, next time you turn on, default to the color of the last time you turned off (default 15 minutes to turn off automatically) The color of the light strip can be used to set the color by APP, and when you set the color, you can turn on the underbed light Back motor extends, releases to stop (first circuit) Foot motor extends, releases to stop (second circuit) Back motor retracted, released to stop (first circuit) Foot motor retracts, release stops (second circuit) Flashlight on/off (default 30s). Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, enter memorizable mode, release the flashlight, press M1 within 2 seconds, the control box rings 3 times to memorize the current position, if you do not press the memorize position button within 2 seconds, you will exit from the editing and memorizing position mode;
28 SR69_old.hex Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight+ FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight flashes 3 times to enter the continuous pressing mode, at this time, all the position buttons enter the continuous pressing mode, release the button motor to stop. Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight + lock key at the same time for about 3S, the backlight flashes 2 times, enter the one key release mode, at this time, all position keys enter the one key release pressure mode, can be reset at the same time the memory location of the memory key to the factory default settings FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to minimum travel position,
(power-on does not reset)
(If massager is on, turn off massager; do not turn off underbed light) Enhancement: In Music Follow Mode, pressing this button will enhance the vibration intensity of the Follow Motion, cycling through 0-1-2-3 steps (default 1 step when entering Music Follow Mode). Bluetooth switch: power on in the Bluetooth off state, the audio prompts "off Bluetooth" or "Bluetooth off", at this time the Bluetooth device can not be searched for, the music follows the operation area of the key no response Press the button, the bluetooth function is open, (such as the massager is open, close the massager) audio prompts "open bluetooth, wait for the connection" or "Bluetooth on, please wait" at this time to open the cell phone bluetooth, you can Search for Bluetooth devices and connect, connect successfully, the sound prompts "Bluetooth connected successfully" or "bluetooth connected", play music, the first time you power on the use of the vibrator to the default intensity of the 1-step music with the running Press the button again, the Bluetooth function is turned off, the audio prompts "Bluetooth off" or "Bluetooth off". The Bluetooth function of the device is on, turn off the Bluetooth of the cell phone, the audio prompts "Bluetooth disconnected" or
"Bluetooth disconnected". When synchronized: Bluetooth control synchronized on/off If any of the massagers is on, tap the button, massage off (because there is no off function for massager enhancement), the If all massages are off, click the button to turn on all massages, the massager defaults to the last time it was off Music Pause/Play: Tap the button to play the music, operate again to pause the music 28Hz/40Hz: Vibrator 28Hz/40Hz switching (power-on default 28Hz) The operation button is effective only when the array gear is not 0 gear 29 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 If the head massager is turned on at the end of the head massager, press the button to turn on the massager, the default intensity of the massager is the intensity and mode when it was last turned off;
If the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in the order of: low
- medium - high, the default time of 15 minutes, to reach the highest intensity, the intensity remains unchanged Mode switching: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state of the last time it was turned off, this button enables the massager to cycle between 4 modes: Continuous - low-speed wave - medium-speed wave -
high-speed wave, the intensity of mode switching remains unchanged Press and hold for 5S, the backlight will flash and all massagers will be turned off. If the foot massager is not open, press the button to open the massager, the massager defaults to the state of the last time it was closed, if the massager has been opened, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 strengths, in accordance with:
low - medium - high order, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of continuous operation Attention:
If the massager (including music followers) is turned on, the motor runs, the intensity of the massager's vibration is reduced to 1 gear, the motor stops to restore the original gear Code pairing mode 1: (Code pairing is performed within 60 seconds of the control box) 1. Keep pressing the [HEAD UP+ FOOT DOWN] button until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control code information. 2. Power on the control box, the control box will be in the code state in 60s, keep pressing the [head down + foot up] button of the remote control until you hear the buzzer ringing 1 sound, it means the code is successful. Code pairing mode 2: (Code pairing after the control box exceeds 60S) 1. Keep pressing the [HEAD UP+ FOOT DOWN] button until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control code information. 2. Press the control box code key, the buzzer sounds 3 times, keep pressing the remote control [head down + foot up], the buzzer sounds 1 time, prompting the code success!
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function (Continuous press mode does not chase synchronization):
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the 30 synchronization cables. Bluetooth grouping:
First confirm that the bluetooth is open, the cell phone bluetooth and control box bluetooth connection, and connect successfully, if you want to team up with the music vibrator from the machine, long press the button "pause + bluetooth switch" button, the backlight flashes, bluetooth into the teaming mode, the sound prompts "waiting for teaming "or "pairing", if prompted "teaming successful , bluetooth connection successful" or "pairing successful If prompted "teaming successful, bluetooth connection successful" or "pairing successful", it suggests successful pairing. If the group is unsuccessful, the sound will indicate "grouping failure" or
"pairing failure". Cancel the grouping:
Cancel pairing, long press "Pause + Bluetooth switch" button, the backlight blinks, the audio prompts the host: "team disconnect" or "unpairing complete ", and the sound prompts the host: "team disconnect" or "unpairing complete". If there is no group: play music, only the audio connected to the phone is played If the team is successful: play music, two stereos at the same time Music demo mode:
First open the Bluetooth switch, confirm that the Bluetooth is connected, and then press the key combination "pause + vibration" to enter the built-in music mode, the audio prompts "U disk play" or "USB access The audio prompts "U disk play" or "USB access", automatically play music, open the music with the intensity at the same time open the highest gear (3 gears), such as not recognizing the USB flash drive, it prompts "unrecognized device" or "unrecognized device"; "Pause
+ with vibration" to enter the Bluetooth music mode, the audio prompts "open Bluetooth, wait for connection, Bluetooth connected successfully" or "Bluetooth on, please wait , bluetooth connected". bluetooth connected". Pause the music, turn on the music with the intensity at the same time open the low gear (1 gear) Note: Music vibrator compatible music format and U disk format: music format support MP3, wav, wma three; U disk partition unit size must be less than 8192 bytes, format support FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, exFAT, does not support NTFS. Note: (default function) 1. Press any button for more than 60s, the remote control will go into hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. 2. When pressing the flashlight button, the remote control enters into sleep time for 30 seconds, and enters into sleep time for 6 seconds when pressing other buttons on the remote control. 31 3. Control box without power-on reset 4. No reset function for the control box code key. 5. Remote control no operation 5 seconds backlight directly extinguished, into the hibernation reserved function SNORE One-button release mode is timed for 15min, then flatten and turn off the massager, press any button that can operate the motor to exit the timer; Continuous pressing mode has no timer.
(If you are in the SNORE position, the timer starts, and then you click the SNORE command again, the timer has to be reset.) Stop Snoring Intervention - Functional Criteria functional function NO Detailed Functional Contents zone block Stop Snoring Interventio n 1 2 trigger condition Sleep detection band two people in bed to sleep a person in bed to sleep and another person is not in bed Any side of the sleep monitoring belt monitoring band snoring signal, that is, to trigger snoring intervention, the motor position must be in the 0mm flat position Stop snore raise process: run at 50% of the original motor speed to the snore position. Stop Snoring Automatic leveling 15 minutes after raising to snore Motor Action position Stop snore leveling process: run at 50% of the original motor speed and lower to the reset position. 32 Up to 3 consecutive stop snoring actions, the control box will stop responding to snoring commands from the sleep 3 Retrigger. monitor until the control box is reset by pressing any button on the remote control (reset after 8 hours if no buttons are operated) 4 Anti-snoring After the Stop Snore intervention, the motor runs to the position Anti snore position. Vibrator Stop 5 Snoring Stop snoring intervention ineffective when vibrator is on Intervention Motorized 6 Stop Snoring Intervention Stop snoring intervention not effective if motor position exceeds >18mm, C65 off-bed sensing not effective RGB off-bed control functional function NO Detailed Functional Contents zone block RGB Sensor Light Strip 1 remote control When the underbed light is off, operate the button to turn on the underbed light;
When the underbed light is on, operate the button to turn off the underbed light;
The color of the light strip is set by APP, the remote control has no color switching function. Timing off: after the remote control is turned on, it will be 33 automatically turned off in 15 minutes by default (only RGB is timed, T21 has no timer off).
(Note: the system can be connected to T21 and RGB light strip, through the access detection judgment, the implementation of one of the control logic) 1, can set the color of the light strip. Red, orange, yellow, green, green, blue, purple, white, 8 colors can be set 2 APP control 2, Adjustable light strip brightness, 3 grades adjustment;
3, 4 timing off stalls, 15min, 30min, 60min, always on;
4, away from the bed sensor function switch;
1App can set the Motion Activated Function on or off;
2. Both T79 and sleep monitoring band can be used as the bed departure sensor signal;
3When a person leaves the bed, the light signal, T79 or the sleep monitoring belt is the first to sense the priority;
4, C65 sleep monitoring RGB sensor function, can be individually set in the APP on or off (default off) RGB off-bed sensing Synchronized state sensing, the light strip lights up the synchronized corresponding side of the control box to set the color, control there is no sense of the side of the bed does not light up 3 3 If you turn on the massager or vibrator, away from the bed sensor light is invalid, such as away from the bed sensor inductive 4 logic light is turned on, after turning on the massager or vibrator, can only be manually turned off the underbed relationship light Invalid off-bed sensor light when motor stroke >18mm 34 V. Bluetooth function description initial step Scan the code to download the mobile app. In China, please click "Android Mirror 1" or "Android Mirror 2" to download;
Outside of China, please click "Google Play" to download. second step Click on "App Store" to download. 35 third step Open the AppRMControl software link to the "QRRMXXXXXXXX" 10-digit device. Scan the QR code, the operation interface appears, at this time the phone can control the operation of the motor (power off to clear the link). fourth step Input "AQRM", click search, the operation interface appears, then the phone can control the operation of the motor (power off to clear the link). 36 SR69-004 (Adaptor Vibrator PCBA) initial step Scan the code to download the mobile app.(QR code for Android) second step Android Download Interface Apple download interface (Apple has no picture yet because it is not on the shelves) 37 third step Open the App software link to the
"QRRMXXXXXXXX" 10-digit device. Select the "confirm" button to enter the device selection interface. fourth step After all the devices are connected, the system will automatically detect the peripherals, automatic detection is finished, click the
"confirm" button to enter the device operation interface. after the This interface is the device detection interface, if the peripheral is not connected, the display will be "X". 38 Motor Operator Interface Note:
will be displayed only when connected to LEDs, and will not be displayed when connected to RGB. Memory Position Operator Interface Click to manually memorize and save the fixed position of the motor. Click "Erase All Favorites" to restore the factory settings of the fixed location, one-click release mode. Massager control interface, click on the will back/leg automatically drop down to show the current massager gears massager icon, it 39 Click "Add Alarm" to enter the alarm setting interface. Set the time the alarm clock needs to run Click on "Mode" to set the way the alarm runs. 40 Select the date on which the alarm needs to run Can be set to run Monday through Sunday Or click on the slider to the right of
"Single" to set up a single run. Once you've set your settings, click
"Save". After the alarm is saved, the set alarm time and action position will be displayed in the alarm interface Attention:
1. Alarm set time cleared when control box is powered down 2. After the alarm clock responds, only the alarm clock side of the electronic control box responds to the action 3. Alarm motor: motor runs directly into position 4. Alarm clock massager: to the alarm time, head and foot massager at the same time open, low-speed wave run 60S -
medium-speed wave run 60S - high-speed wave run 60S, after the end of the run, the massager stops the action, press any button to interrupt the alarm clock massager run If the first vibration of the massager is not interrupted, then after 5 minutes, the massager continues to alarm reminder, until pressing any button of the remote control to interrupt the massager alarm, otherwise the massager alarm runs once every 5 minutes 41 This screen is only displayed when the RGB is connected. Click the color button to change the color of the RGB light bar Click on the box under "Brightness" to change the brightness of the RGB strip. Select "Time" to change the default off time of the RGB strip. Select "Motion Activated Function". Infrared sensor switch can be set, if set sensor on, the RGB light bar will be turned on automatically after sensing a person (only the connected control box is set) Music Vibrator Control Interface Click follower button, it will automatically drop down to show the music follower gear, click the gear, you can change the follower intensity 42 Add a sleep monitoring system, enter the sleep monitoring interface, which can display the quality of sleep (the device is automatically connected, no need to manually connect) Average heart rate (displayed after data is available) Average respiration (displayed when data is available) 43 Number of physical movements (displayed when data are available) Average number of snores (data to be displayed when available) Click on "Options" to enter the Sensor Belt Settings screen. Click on the "Occupancy Detection Activated RGB" sliding bar on the right side, you can set whether to leave the bed sensing or not, if you set the bed sensing on, then after leaving the bed, the light bar will be turned on automatically (only set the connected control box). Click on "Operation Mode" to set up a single or double bed (only the connected control box is set up). Click on the slider to the right of the
"Anti Snore Function" to activate the anti-snoring intervention (only for the connected control box). Left / Right Snoreing Debug, for temporary debugging, after the official version, these two commands will be canceled. 44 Click "
" in the upper left corner to enter the setting interface Re-selecting peripheral accessories Theme Setting Renameable for Bluetooth devices One-touch release mode Continuous pressing mode Sleep data reminder
(vii) Version information Caveats:
1. To protect the reliability and safety of the motor and control box, do not switch the keys frequently. 2. For the first time use or accidental power failure during operation, it must be reset and then used again. 3. Prohibit the plugging and unplugging of equipment with electricity, plugging and unplugging with electricity is a violation of the operation, such as accidentally plugged and unplugged with electricity, need to reset and then use 4. After the test, you must use the supporting remote control to restore the factory settings, (flashlight + LOCK (lock)) System Configuration Diagram 45 Product Specification Sheet Control Box Specification Sheet Control Box Models HJC18N BOM 108680C180401 PCBA number 610C18GC0000 program number synchronization method specification code Y communication method P# TBD***C18-51XX-0025BE3B-*C18GC0172V10 H6C0172 12TTC18GC000 BT
*Because the customer's old program number can not be changed, the new program number and the old program number is only a different name, the content is the same, the specification code for the new program number Remote control specification table Remote Control Models HJH124 BOM 8H1240001 PCBA number 61H124B00000 program number 12TTH1240000 scale code 46 Remote Control Models HJH124 BOM 8H1240006 PCBA number 61H124B00000 program number 12TTH1240003 scale code Remote Control Models HJH301 (L&P) BOM 8H3010004 PCBA number 61H301A10000 program number 12TTH301A100 scale code Remote Control Models HJH92E (RICHMAT) BOM 10868H92E0004 PCBA number 610H92X10001 program number 12TTH92X1011 scale code Remote Control Models HJH92B (RICHMAT) BOM 10868H92B0005 PCBA number 610H92X10001 program number 12TTH92X1012 scale code Remote Control Models SR95 BOM H1086-SR95-001 PCBA number 61SR95B00000 program number H6C0024 H6C0119 control code Remote Control Models P# to be determined** SR95-51XX-00A4BE7C/SR95B00024V10 P# to be determined** SR95-01XX-5726703F/SR95B00119V10 HJSR81D BOM H1086-SR81D-002 PCBA number 61SR81CA0000 program number H6C0369 specification code P# to be determined* SR81C-51XX-000E167F/SR81CA0369V11
*Do not leave blank any field that is not required, please cut it out or fill in "N/A". 47 Change of curriculum vitae releases Date of change V1.4 2022/12/12 Summary of Changes Fixed position modification M1, H31F79 to H25F25; M2, H112F46 to H20F40 V1.5 2022/12/16 Adding H92E/H92B remote control V1.6 2023.9.21 Add SR95 remote control source (of information etc) TAPD TAPD TAPD V1.7 2024.1.13 Add SR81 remote control, change control box new key value, new program number 1086-23122801-Better Sleep Electronics New BT Control Box Program 48 V1.8 2024.4.12 V1.9 2024.4.25 v2.0 2024.5.10 1. The flashlight auto-off time is modified to 30 seconds;
2. All memory position interfaces changed to 5 memory positions + FLAT interface Modification: 1: resting hibernation time 2: lock status popup logic Changing the remote control sleep time Add SLEEP 1.2.3 key value, remove SR81E remote control v2.1 2024.6.7 Changing the function of FLAT-2 Change SR95 lock status v2.2 2024.7.8 Add FLAT3 function V2.3 2024.7.17 V2.4 2024.8.30 Changing the rest time for different UI screens of SR95 Caution:
49 Customer Request-1086-2024032001-
SR95 Remote Control UI Modification Customer Request-1086-2024032001-
SR95 Remote Control UI Modification 1086-24042301-Modifying the remote control Sleep Timer and upgrading the remote control program version number 1086-24041801 - Creating a new Better Sleep remote and replacing an existing one 1086-24041801 - Creating a new Better Sleep remote and replacing an existing one Customer needs-1086-2024032001-SR95 remote control UI modification 20035-24062801-New key combination to realize FLAT3 function and change the long press motor down reset hall number time from 1.25 seconds to 300 milliseconds. Customer Requirements-20035-24071501-
Lock Function Setting Customer Requirements-20035-24082001-
SR95 Backlight Off Time Change Hibernation and This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 50
| various | Users Manual | 1.25 MiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 |
Product Proposals Title of the proposal KS1086_0071 Areas of use electric bed Certification Requirements FCC, ETL of Overview special requirements of Type product used Country or region of use stay at home (unemployed) United States of America person demand on Meng Zhaodong Project Manager Friendship Wang Test Engineer Tai Yanqin
(1913-1996), Chinese poet Date of submission of proposals 2022/12/02 release v1.0 v1.1 v1.2 v1.3 v1.4 Date (of issue) N/A 2022/12/02 2022/12/16 2022/12/2 3 2023/03/24 release V1.5 V1.6 V1.7 V1.8 v1.9 Date (of issue) 2023.10.13 2024.1.11 2024.4.7 2024.4.25 2024.5.10 release v2.0 v2.1 V2.2 V2.3 Date (of issue) 2024.6.7 2024.7.8 2024.7.17 2024.8.30 Note: This manual is temporarily uploaded to the shared disk, in case there are changes in the middle of the demand, the loss of information, internal 1 information to be confirmed by the customer in the use of the customer in the absence of the removal of this precautionary note, the first use of the V1.8 version of the manual inspection Second, the remote control key diagram YS-SR69-001 YS-SR69B-002-L YS-SR69B-002-P YS-SR69C-001 YS-SR69D-001 YS-SR69F-002 YS-SR69F-001 H55 2 10868h92s0004 10868h92s0005 sr95 P SR81C SR81D Full-featured Remote Control for Authentication 3 SR69-004 III. Fixed position dimensions old key value HEAD (mm) FOOT (mm) LUMBAR (mm) ZG 31 79 0 SNORE TV 18 114 0 0 46 0 M1 25 25 0 M2 20 40 0 FLAT 0 0 0 new key value SLEEP-1 ZG-2 SLEEP-3 SNORE-2 TV-2 SLEEP-2 M1-2 M2-2 FLAT-2 FLAT-3 HEAD (mm) FOOT (mm) 30 30 30 10 0 0 4 10 10 0 0 20 20 20 20 Memory function operation, the head and feet first run to the memory position, then the lumbar and pillow motors start to run. One control box can only be used for one type of remote control, and it is prohibited to use the same control box for both old and new code value remote controls. For interspersed testing, factory settings must be restored using the accompanying remote control (flashlight + LOCK) Fourth, the remote control function description key labeling Functions (SR69) 1 2 The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) Button lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available;
Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight blinks 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used. 3 UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the M1 position with one touch (with initial value). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) PILLOW RISE: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to rise, 4 5 6 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 release this key, the PILLOW motor rises and stops. PILLOW DOWN: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to descend, release this key, the PILLOW motor descends and stops. Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Flashlight on/off (default 30s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter into the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE/M1 within 2s, the buzzer will be "beep beep beep", it can memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping FLAT one-button reset, all motors simultaneously retract to minimum stroke position, shut down massager (no reset on power-up) Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops LUMBAR RISE: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor rises and stops. LUMBAR DOWN: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to descend, release this key, the LUMBAR motor descends and stops. If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Turn on and off the massager: Tap this button to turn on the back and leg massager; tap this button again to turn off the back and leg massager. If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase 6 the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Lower the head massager intensity button, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. WAVE button: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between continuous-low wave-mid wave-high wave, 4 modes. Press and hold for approx. 5 seconds, the backlight flashes to turn off the massager Decrease the intensity of the foot massager for 3 intensities and press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. Turn on and off the massager: Tap this button to turn on the back massager; tap this button again to turn off the back massager. 19 20 21 22
(default function) Note: Press any button for more than 50s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. The remote control goes to sleep for 30 seconds only when the flashlight button is pressed, and for 15 seconds when other buttons on the remote control are pressed.
(Default function) Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in code pairing status in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of the remote control until you hear the buzzer ringing, and the backlight flashes to indicate the code pairing is successful. Single control box to dual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information;
re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the code pairing state in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 1 has been successful; don't press any buttons of remote control 1, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 2 has been successful. Don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight blinks, it means the remote control 2 is successful in code pairing, when switching between the two remote controls, you need to wait for the first one to disconnect from the bluetooth connection and then the second one can control it. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two 7 systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Note: 1, the control box can be powered on 60s after the code key to open the code, the buzzer sounded three times to enter the code state, the control box code key no reset function 2Remote control no operation for 5 seconds backlight directly off, about 6 seconds after the remote control into sleep at the same time bluetooth disconnect, press the button again bluetooth reconnect. 3When the control box is powered up for the first time or when the power is accidentally disconnected, please reset it before using it. 4Dual control box to dual remote control, when switching the remote control key mode, press one remote control to switch can change the key mode of both remote control at the same time. 5Continuous press mode does not chase synchronization
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. When press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes and the buzzer "tick" "tick" "tick" enters the Split-top synchronization mode, in this mode the head motor is in split-control mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head up/down or memory position buttons is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to its control box successfully. In this mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head lift or memory position button is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with which it has successfully paired the code. Press the head-down and foot-down buttons again and the buzzer sounds a long beep to release the Split-top synchronization mode. The following features are reserved M3: Motor one-touch operation to M3 position Repeat function: Record the current motor position and status of massager and light bar to M3. (Power failure will not clear) M4: One-touch motor operation to M4 position Repeat function: Record the current motor position and massager and light bar status to M4. (Power failure does not clear) massage off: turn off all massagers massage on/off: turn on/off the massager (default 15Min when turned on and in the same state as the last time it was turned off) Clear Memory: All memory positions can be reset to the factory default setting memory positions 19 20 21 22 23 8 24 25 26 27 28 29 Head and foot motors extend at the same time Head and foot motors retract at the same time.
"PILLOW" motor extends and releases to stop.
"LUMBAR" motor extends and releases to stop.
"PILLOW" motor down, release to stop.
"LUMBAR" motor drops, release to stop. H55 key labeling 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 functionality Underbed light on/off (always on). Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter into the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE/TV/M1/M2 within 2s, the buzzer will be "beep beep beep beep", it can memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. Press and hold M1+ flashlight at the same time for 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all the memorized positions to the memorized positions set by factory default at the same time. Press and hold FLAT + flashlight at the same time for 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. FLAT one-button reset, all motors retract to the minimum travel position, turn off the massager, and remain in the same state as before the button was pressed
(no reset on power-up) The head motor extends. The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) The foot motor extends. Head motor retracts The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Foot motor retracts Motor one-touch operation to M1 position (with initial value) Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) Motor one-touch operation to TV position (with initial values) Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) Motor one-touch operation to M2 position (with initial value) Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium ->
high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . TIME ON/OFF massager switch and timing button, press the button to turn on the massager (the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off). And timer 15min-> timer 30min-> close the massager and timer, the timer time is displayed by two indicator lights. If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium ->
High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Lower the head massager intensity button, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. WAVE button: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between continuous-low wave-mid wave-high wave, 4 modes. Decrease the intensity of the foot massager for 3 intensities and press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. Note: Press any button for more than 50s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: continuously press the head up and foot down buttons (4, 9) until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control code pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box 10 will be in code pairing status for 60s, continuously press the head up and foot down buttons (7, 6) of the remote control until you hear the buzzer ringing and the backlight blinking to indicate the code pairing success. Single control box to dual remotes: keep pressing the head-up and foot-down buttons (4,9) until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in pairing status in 60s, keep pressing the head-down and foot-up buttons (7,6) of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes, which indicates that the pairing of remote control 1 has been successful; don't press any buttons of remote control 1, the control box will be in pairing status for 60s. Do not press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons (7,6) of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight blinking, it means that remote control 2 is successful in code pairing, when switching between the two remotes, you need to wait for the first remote control to disconnect from the bluetooth connection and then the next one can be controlled. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Note: 1, the control box can be powered on 60s after the code key to open the code, the buzzer sounded three times to enter the code state, the control box code key no reset function 6The backlight goes off after 10s of no operation of the remote control, hibernates after 15s while Bluetooth is disconnected, and Bluetooth is reconnected by pressing the button again. 7When the control box is powered up for the first time or when the power is accidentally disconnected, please reset it before using it. 8Dual control box to dual remote control, when switching the remote control key mode, press one remote control to switch can change the key mode of both remote control at the same time. 9Continuous press mode does not chase synchronization Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box is connected to this control box Synchronized operation. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. When press the head down and foot down buttons (7,9) at the same time, the backlight flashes and the buzzer "beep" "beep" "beep" to enter the Split-top synchronization mode, in this mode the head motor is in split-control mode. In this mode, the head motor is in Split-top synchronization mode, no matter the head motor corresponding 11 to the head lift or memory position button is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with which it has successfully paired the code. Press the head-down and foot-down buttons (7, 9) again and the buzzer sounds a long beep to release the Split-top synchronization mode. 10868H92S0004 key labeling 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Functional Description UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter into the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE/M1 within 2s, the buzzer will be "beep beep beep", it can memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter the continuous pressing mode, release the buttons motor stops Button lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available;
Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops PILLOW RISE: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to rise, release this key, the PILLOW motor rises and stops. PILLOW DOWN: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to descend, release this key, the PILLOW motor descends and stops. 12 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the M1 position with one touch (with initial value). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Decrease the intensity of the head massager button, 3 intensity, reach the lowest intensity when pressing the massager again to turn off If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Decrease the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn off when you reach the lowest intensity FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to minimum travel position, shut off massager (no reset on power-up) If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn the massager on, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between Continuous-Low Wave-Medium Wave-High Wave, 4 modes. Press and hold for 5s, the backlight flashes to turn off the massager. Intensity remains the same after mode switching
(Default Function) Note: Press any button for more than 50s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. 13
(Default function) Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in code pairing status in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of the remote control until you hear the buzzer ringing, and the backlight flashes to indicate the code pairing is successful. Single control box to dual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information;
re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the code pairing state in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 1 has been successful; don't press any buttons of remote control 1, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 2 has been successful. Don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight blinks, it means the remote control 2 is successful in code pairing, when switching between the two remote controls, you need to wait for the first one to disconnect from the bluetooth connection and then the second one can control it. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Attention:
1Control box can be opened by pressing the code key after powering up for 60s, the buzzer will ring three times to enter the code state, the control box code key has no reset function. 2, the remote control no operation for 5 seconds backlight directly out, about 6 seconds after the remote control into hibernation at the same time bluetooth disconnect, press the button again bluetooth reconnect. 3. When the control box is powered up for the first time or when the power is cut off accidentally, please reset it before using it. 4Dual control box to dual remote control, switch the remote control key mode when pressing a remote control switch can change the key mode of two remote controls at the same time. 5. Continuous pressing mode without chasing synchronization
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box is connected to this control box Synchronized operation. 14 When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. When press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes and the buzzer "tick" "tick" "tick" enters the Split-top synchronization mode, in this mode the head motor is in split-control mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head up/down or memory position buttons is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to its control box successfully. In this mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head lift or memory position button is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with which it has successfully paired the code. Press the head-down and foot-down buttons again and the buzzer sounds a long beep to release the Split-top synchronization mode. The following features are reserved M3: Motor one-touch operation to M3 position Repeat function: Record the current motor position and status of massager and light bar to M3. (Power failure will not clear) M4: One-touch motor operation to M4 position Repeat function: Record the current motor position and massager and light bar status to M4. (Power failure does not clear) massage off: turn off all massagers massage on/off: turn on/off the massager (default 15Min when turned on and in the same state as the last time it was turned off) Clear Memory: All memory positions can be reset to the factory default setting memory positions Head and foot motors extend at the same time Head and foot motors retract at the same time.
"LUMBAR" motor extends and releases to stop.
"LUMBAR" motor drops, release to stop. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 10868H92S0005 key labeling 1 2 Functional Description UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter into the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE/M1 within 2s, the buzzer will be "beep beep beep", it can memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control 15 enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter the continuous pressing mode, release the buttons motor stops Button lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available;
Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops PILLOW RISE: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to rise, release this key, the PILLOW motor rises and stops. PILLOW DOWN: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to descend, release this key, the PILLOW motor descends and stops. LUMBAR RISE: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor rises and stops. The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) LUMBAR DOWN: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to descend, release this key, the LUMBAR motor descends and stops. If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Decrease the intensity of the head massager button, 3 intensity, reach the lowest intensity when pressing the massager again to turn off If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase 16 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Decrease the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn off when you reach the lowest intensity FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to minimum travel position, shut off massager (no reset on power-up) If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn the massager on, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between Continuous-Low Wave-Medium Wave-High Wave, 4 modes. Press and hold for 5s, the backlight flashes to turn off the massager. Intensity remains the same after mode switching 16 17 18
(Default Function) Note: Press any button for more than 50s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function.
(Default function) Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in code pairing status in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of the remote control until you hear the buzzer ringing, and the backlight flashes to indicate the code pairing is successful. Single control box to dual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information;
re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the code pairing state in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 1 has been successful; don't press any buttons of remote control 1, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 2 has been successful. Don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight blinks, it means the remote control 2 is successful in code pairing, when switching between the two remote controls, you need to wait for the first one to disconnect from the bluetooth connection and then the second one can control it. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Attention:
1Control box can be opened by pressing the code key after powering up for 60s, 17 the buzzer will ring three times to enter the code state, the control box code key has no reset function. 2, the remote control no operation for 5 seconds backlight directly out, about 6 seconds after the remote control into hibernation at the same time bluetooth disconnect, press the button again bluetooth reconnect. 3. When the control box is powered up for the first time or when the power is cut off accidentally, please reset it before using it. 4Dual control box to dual remote control, switch the remote control key mode when pressing a remote control switch can change the key mode of two remote controls at the same time. 5. Continuous pressing mode without chasing synchronization
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. When press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes and the buzzer "tick" "tick" "tick" enters the Split-top synchronization mode, in this mode the head motor is in split-control mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head up/down or memory position buttons is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to its control box successfully. In this mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head lift or memory position button is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with which it has successfully paired the code. Press the head-down and foot-down buttons again and the buzzer sounds a long beep to release the Split-top synchronization mode. The following features are reserved M3: Motor one-touch operation to M3 position Repeat function: Record the current motor position and status of massager and light bar to M3. (Power failure will not clear) M4: One-touch motor operation to M4 position Repeat function: Record the current motor position and massager and light bar status to M4. (Power failure does not clear) massage off: turn off all massagers massage on/off: turn on/off the massager (default 15Min when turned on and in the same state as the last time it was turned off) Clear Memory: All memory positions can be reset to the factory default setting memory positions Head and foot motors extend at the same time Head and foot motors retract at the same time. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 18 The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the M1 position with one touch (with initial value). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) 26 27 SR95 key labeling 1 2 3 Underbed light: press this button to turn on the underbed light; press this button again to turn off the underbed light. Flashlight: Tap this button to turn on the flashlight (automatically turn off after 30S), tap this button again to turn off the flashlight in the on state. The flashlight status is displayed in real time on the status bar
,no icon is displayed when the flashlight is off. Lock: When the remote control functions are not locked, press this key in any interface, according to the prompts in the pop-up window, "YES"
is selected by default, press OK key to execute "YES", then all the functions of the remote control will be locked and return to the main interface. The status bar will display the lock icon, which will be canceled automatically after 2S. Operate the remote control in locked status, the screen pop-up window will prompt the unlock mode, and the pop-up window will be canceled automatically after 15S. (After locking, power off and on again, it will remain locked) Locked:
1. When the screen goes off:
Press and hold any of the buttons (except the LOCK button), the lock symbol will appear for about 1 second, then a text message will appear with instructions on how to unlock it 2. when the screen is on:
Pressing and holding any button (except the LOCK button) displays a text message indicating how to unlock it. 19 Unlock: press and hold this key for 5S when the remote control is locked, all functions of the remote control will be unlocked, and the unlock icon will pop-up in the screen, and the pop-up window will be canceled automatically after 2S, and the interface at this time will be the main interface; (the interface after the remote control is locked and unlocked will be the main interface) 1. When the screen is off: Press and hold the LOCK button for 7 seconds to unlock the remote control. 2. When the screen is on: press and hold the LOCK button for 5 seconds to unlock the remote control. Upward \ Motor Rise Button: Tap this button, the preselection frame moves upward to the current position and the main interface controls the motor rise. Left button: Tap this button to move the preselection box to the left of the current position. OK button: Press this button to confirm the execution of the current preselected function. Right button:Tap this button to move the cursor to the right of the current position. 4 5 6 7 8 Down\Motor Descent Button: Tap this button, the cursor moves downward to the current position; the main interface controls the motor descent 9 Tap this button to go to the massager setting interface: In this interface, operate the remote control "up and down" buttons to adjust the pre-selected functions. The massager defaults to the state when it was turned off last time. The first line: back massager gear adjustment, the current interface is selected by default, when selected, the back icon in the center of the dark blue display. Tap to the left button massager downshift, tap to the right button massager upshift; a total of high, medium and low three gears, low gears continue to downshift the massager off, high gears continue to upshift the control box does not respond. The second line: leg massager gear adjustment, selected when the center icon dark blue display, click down button, will select the leg massager gear adjustment function, then click to the left button massager gear reduction, click to the right button massager gear; a total of high, medium, low three gears, low gears continue to reduce the gears when the leg massager is closed, high-grade position continue to gear up no reaction. The third line: massage mode switching, pre-selected box is selected and then tap OK key to switch the massager mode. Press OK to light up the dark blue color, release OK to change the pre-selected box. A total of four modes incremental cycle, the order: Constan, WAVE1, WAVE2, WAVE3, 20 Constan, WAVE1 ... (Mode switching turns on the massager) Press and hold this button for 5S to turn off all massagers. 10 Tap this key from any screen to enter the main drive control screen. 11 Tap this key in any screen to go to the setting screen of the memorized position;
Tap the pre-selected box to reach the memorized position. Press and hold 5S to save the current position to the pre-selected mode, after saving successfully, the pop-up window will prompt, 15S will cancel automatically. Tap OK to cancel immediately (FLAT does not have long-press memory function) Memory position memorizes the current motor position and massager and light bar status. After the remote control is powered on, it will automatically turn on and the screen will display the logo interface. Three to five seconds will enter the motor selection interface, the user according to their own bed type to choose the number of motors and massagers, can operate the upper and lower buttons for pre-selection
(blue box), press OK to confirm the selection (blue solid dot). After the selection is completed, move the pre-selected box to the CONTINUE, press the OK button. (This set of configurations can choose to tow three configurations or tow four configurations) 1If you select HEAD, FOOT, PILLOW remote control: occiput, back, legs 2If HEAD, FOOT, LUMBAR is selected Remote Control: Back, Waist, Legs 3If you select HEAD, FOOT, PILLOW, LUMBAR Remote control: occiput, back, waist, legs Second, the number of motors and massager selection is completed, the control box power on 60S within the point of OK key for pairing with the control box (if the control box is powered on more than 60S, first press the code key, the buzzer sounds three times, and then press the OK key to pair with the control box), after entering the main interface, it means that the pairing code is successful. (If the remote control has been paired with the control box automatically after powering up, it will enter the main interface automatically after the customer logo interface) In the main interface, press the remote control "OK" button to enter the main menu interface. 1. The first function is FAVORITES, which is consistent with the function of 11 buttons 2The second function is MASSAGE, the same function as No.9 button. 3. The third function is time and alarm setting. Alarm Clock: Adjust the preselected box to the ALARM position (selected by default) and then tap "OK" button. The alarm time can be set. Tap "OK" button, 21 the ALARM icon will turn dark blue and the preselection box will reach the hour icon. At this time, tap the "Up or Down button" to adjust the clock digits (press the Up button, the up arrow turns darker, release it to turn lighter; press the Down button, the down arrow turns darker, release it to turn lighter),
(12-hour system, 01-12 cycle). After the hour digit adjustment is completed, tap the right button to adjust the preselected box position to reach the minute icon position, tap the up or down button to adjust the clock digit (press the up button, the up arrow becomes darker and releases to become lighter; press the down button, the down arrow becomes darker and releases to become lighter), (00-59 cycle). When the time setting is finished, press the right button, you can move the dark blue check box to select AM or PM by pressing the up and down buttons, press the OK button, the pre-selected box will arrive at the alarm switch, press the right button to turn on the alarm, and press the left button to turn off the alarm. Tap OK button again to go back to the previous interface (main menu). Alarm Clock Wake Up Operation (Daily Alarm Clock): (Feet open first, head open in a very short time) Head and feet massager at the same time low 20 seconds, medium 20S, high 20S, then close. 60 seconds to operate the remote control of any button to directly turn off all the massagers. Meanwhile, keep the alarm clock on. (Note: the mode and gear when the alarm clock is turned on is the state of the last time it was turned off, if it is turned off in 2 gears, then the alarm clock will be in 2 gears 20S, 3 gears 40S) Time: Tap the right button and the preselection box reaches the icon position of TIME, press OK button and the preselection box reaches the icon position of HOURS, tap the up or down button to adjust the clock digits (press the up button, the up arrow becomes darker, and releases it to become lighter;
press the down button, the down arrow becomes darker, and releases it to become lighter), 12-hour system, 01-12 cycle; after finishing the adjustment of the hourly digits, tap the right button After the hour digit is adjusted, tap Right button to adjust the preselected box position to reach the minute icon position, tap Up or Down button to adjust the clock digit (press Up button, up arrow turns darker, release to turn lighter;
press Down button, down arrow turns darker, release to turn lighter), (00-59 cycle). When time setting is completed, continue to tap Right button, you can move the dark blue check box to select AM or PM by pressing Up and Down buttons. tap OK button, the pop-up window will display the check mark (2S disappears automatically) and update the time in the status bar; go back to the previous level of the interface (Main Menu). 4. The fourth interface is the setting interface.
(1) Execute the Erase All Favoirtes operation and operate according to the pop-up window, YES to execute the operation and cancel the pop-up window, NO to cancel the pop-up window; YES to confirm that all the information in the memorized locations will be erased after executing this operation.
(2) Execute the Articulations operation and operate according to the popup window, YES 22 to execute the operation and cancel the popup window, NO to cancel the popup window;
YES to confirm that after executing this operation, it will go back to the page selected by the motor, redefine the bed type, and re-match the UI interface.
(3) Execute the Un-Pairing Process operation and operate according to the pop-up window, YES to execute the operation and cancel the pop-up window, NO to cancel the pop-up window; YES to confirm that after executing this operation, the connection between the remote control and the control box will be disconnected, and at the same time, it will go back to the customer's LOGO interface and then select the bed type again.
(4) Execute Press & Release Mode, operate according to the pop-up window, tap OK button to execute the operation and cancel the pop-up window, if there is no operation after 15S, the pop-up window will be canceled automatically. Tap OK button to confirm switching to this mode, it will erase all the memories and restore the one-touch release mode (default mode of the remote control). The round icon in front of the option will change to dark color. At the same time, the round icon in front of Press
& Hold Mode option changes from dark blue to light gray;
(5) Performing Press & Hold Mode operation switches the remote control to Continuous Press Mode. The circular icon in front of this option changes from light gray to dark blue. At the same time, the circular icon in front of the Press & Release Mode option changes from dark blue to light gray
(6) After the implementation of the Brightness option, you can adjust the brightness of the remote control, through the up and down buttons to adjust, a total of three brightness, click the OK button to save and return to the upper level of the menu.
(7) When the About option is executed, it switches to the information about this remote control, tap the OK button to go back to the previous level. Note: Tap to operate the remote control for the first time after hibernation, only wake up, no function, wake up to the main interface. No operation 5thS Bluetooth disconnect. Remote control UI interface hibernation time scratched out for 15S off screen, 5S into hibernation. Specific interface please check the PDF file below key labeling SR81 function (new key value FLAT-2) 1 UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) 2 Flashlight on/off (default 30s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter into the memorizable mode, press SLEEP-1/SLEEP-2/SLEEP-3/FLAT-2 within 2s, the buzzer will be beeping to memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. (FLAT-2 does not memorize the massager and light bar) 23 Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. Key lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight will flash 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available; after locking, press any button
(except lock), the backlight will flash 3 times. Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight blinks 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used. The motor runs to the SLEEP-1 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press SLEEP-1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SLEEP-1.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. The motor runs to the SLEEP-2 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press SLEEP-2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SLEEP-2.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head 24 3 4 5 up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. The motor runs to SLEEP-3 position with one key (with initial value), and runs to FLAT-2 and closes the massager after timing 15min in one key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; Continuous pressing mode has no timing. Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press SLEEP-3 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SLEEP-3. (Power failure does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Maximum operation up to 42.5mm, independent of motor stroke Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Lower the head massager intensity button, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. FLAT-2: motor one-touch operation to FLAT-2 position, without turning off the under-bed light, turning off the massager (with initial value) Reuse function: long press the flashlight for about 5s, backlight flashes, press FLAT-2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position to FLAT-2 (no memory of under-bed light, massager). (Power failure does not clear) 1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 25 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4. Feet up + head down, moving together WAVE button: if the massager is not open, press the button to open the massager, this button can make the massager in the continuous - low-speed wave - medium-speed wave - high-speed wave, 4 modes between the cycle, mode switching intensity remains unchanged Press and hold for 5s to turn off the massager. Intensity remains the same after mode switching If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Decrease the intensity of the foot massager for 3 intensities and press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. FLAT3: FLAT + SLEEP 1, the backlight flashes once and the buzzer beeps briefly once, the motor runs to 0mm / 0mm first, then the head motor runs to 20mm first, and the foot motor runs to 20mm again; to realize the motor hall count reset function 14 15 16 key combinat ion
(Default Function) Note: Press any button for more than 60s, the remote control will enter hibernation, release and press again to restore the function.
(Default function) Pair code method:
Individual control box/individual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code pairing information; re-power on the control box, the control box will be in code pairing status in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of the remote control until you hear the buzzer ringing, and the backlight flashes to indicate the code pairing is successful. Single control box to dual remote control: keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons until the backlight flashes to clear the remote control code information;
re-power on the control box, the control box will be in the code pairing state in 60s, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 1 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 1 has been successful; don't press any buttons of remote control 1, keep pressing the head up and foot down buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight flashes to indicate that the code pairing of remote control 2 has been successful. Don't press any button of remote control 1, keep pressing the head down and foot up buttons of remote control 2 until you hear the buzzer and the backlight blinks, it means the remote control 2 is successful in code pairing, when switching between the two remote controls, you need to wait for the first one to disconnect from the bluetooth connection and then the second one can control it. Dual Control Box to Dual Remote Control: Pair System 1 using the "Single Control 26 Box/Single Remote Control" instructions. Pair System 2 using the "Single Control Box/Single Remote" instructions. Unplug System 1 and System 2. Connect the two systems using the synchronization cable. Power up System 1 and System 2. Both beds will now operate in synchronized mode. Attention:
1Control box can be opened by pressing the code key after powering up for 60s, the buzzer will ring three times to enter the code state, the control box code key has no reset function. 2. The backlight of the remote control goes out directly without operation for 5 seconds, about 6 seconds later the remote control enters into hibernation and Bluetooth disconnects at the same time, press the button again and Bluetooth reconnects. 3. ***** control box initial power up or accidental power failure, must be manually reset before using *****
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Logical Relationships:
1. Judgment when pressing the foot up and foot down buttons:
1.1. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) and above, the feet can run at any angle 1.2. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) ~ -5 degrees (10mm), the foot can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) and below.
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 1.3, head in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the foot can only run below the head position
(0-10mm) (eg: head position 7mm, foot position can only be 7mm) (over the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2. Judgment when pressing the head-up and head-down buttons:
2.1, feet at 0 degrees (20mm) or more, the head can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) or more (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2.2. When the foot is at 0 (20mm) to -5 degrees (10mm), the head can only run at
-5 degrees (10mm) and above
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 2.3, foot in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the head can only be in the foot position and above the operation (for example: foot position 7mm, the head position can only be 7mm operation) (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) key labeling Functions (old SR69 key values - full function program) 1 The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). 27 Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) Button lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available;
Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight blinks 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used. 2 3 UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and the massager is flattened and turned off after 15min timing in one-key release mode, press any key to exit the timing; there is no timing in continuous pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the TV position with one touch (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) The motor runs to the M1 position with one touch (with initial value). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) PILLOW RISE: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to rise, release this key, the PILLOW motor rises and stops. The motor runs to the M2 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) PILLOW DOWN: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to descend, release this key, the PILLOW motor descends and stops. Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and enter the memorizable mode, press ZG/SNORE//TV/M1/M2 within 2s, the buzzer will be beeping to memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and light bar. Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control 28 enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to minimum travel position, shut off massager (no reset on power-up) Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops LUMBAR RISE: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor rises and stops. LUMBAR DOWN: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to descend, release this key, the LUMBAR motor descends and stops. If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Turn on and off the massager: Tap this button to turn on the back and leg massager; tap this button again to turn off the back and leg massager. If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Lower the head massager intensity button, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. WAVE button: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between continuous-low wave-mid wave-high wave, 4 modes. Press and hold for approx. 5 seconds, the backlight flashes to turn off the massager Decrease the intensity of the foot massager for 3 intensities and press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
29 When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. When press the head down and foot down buttons at the same time, the backlight flashes and the buzzer "tick" "tick" "tick" enters the Split-top synchronization mode, in this mode the head motor is in split-control mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head up/down or memory position buttons is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to its control box successfully. In this mode, no matter the head motor corresponding to the head lift or memory position button is running, the remote control can only control the head motor connected to the control box with which it has successfully paired the code. Press the head-down and foot-down buttons again and the buzzer sounds a long beep to release the Split-top synchronization mode. key labeling 1 2 3 4 Functions (SR69 new key values - full function program) The motor runs to the ZG position at the touch of a button (with initial values). Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press ZG within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to ZG.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. Button lock function: Long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times to lock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons are not available;
Press and hold this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight blinks 3 times to unlock the remote control buttons, at this time the remote control buttons can be used. UBL: Underbed light on/off (always on) The motor runs to SNORE position with one key (with initial value), and runs to FLAT-2 and closes the massager after timing 15min in one key release mode, press any key to exit timing; no timing in continuous 30 pressing mode. Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashing, press SNORE within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to SNORE.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. Motor one-touch operation to TV position (with initial values) Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press TV within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to TV.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. The motor runs to the M1 position with one touch (with initial value). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position and massager, light bar status to M1.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. PILLOW RISE: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to rise, release this key, the PILLOW motor rises and stops. The motor runs to the M2 position with one touch (with initial values). Reuse function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position 31 6 6 7 8 the into mode, memorizable and massager, light bar status to M2.(power off does not clear) Feature Description:
1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Note: If there is an outboard motor, the outboard motor will run at the same time after the head and foot motors run into position. There are two priorities when fixing the position: feet down and head up are high priority, and feet up and head down are low priority. PILLOW DOWN: Press and hold this key, the PILLOW motor starts to descend, release this key, the PILLOW motor descends and stops. Back Rise: Press and hold this button, the back motor will start to rise, release this button, the back motor will stop rising. Flashlight on/off (default 15s). Multiplexing Functions:
Press and hold the button for 5s, the backlight will flash and it will enter press ZG-2/TV-2/SNORE-2/M1-2/M2-2/FLAT-2 within 2s, the buzzer will be beeping to memorize the current position of the motor and the status of the massager and the light bar. (FLAT-2 does not memorize the massager and light bar) Press and hold flashlight + LOCK at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks twice, and all position buttons of the remote control enter the one-touch release mode, which can reset all memory positions to the factory default setting memory positions at the same time. Press and hold the flashlight + FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight blinks three times, all position buttons of the remote control enter into the continuous pressing mode, and the motor stops when you release the buttons. Leg Rise: Press and hold this button, the leg motor starts to rise, release this button, the leg motor rise stops Maximum operation up to 42.5mm, independent of motor stroke Back drop: press and hold this button, the back motor starts to drop, release this button, the back motor stops dropping FLAT-2: motor one-touch operation to FLAT-2 position, without turning off the under-bed light, turning off the massager (with initial value) Reuse function: long press the flashlight for about 5s, backlight flashes, press FLAT-2 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record the current motor position to FLAT-2 (no memory of under-bed light, massager). (Power failure does not clear) 1. Foot drop + head drop, foot first drop 2. Foot Rise + Head Rise, Head Rise First 3. Feet down + head up, moving together 32 9 10 11 12 13 14 4. Feet up + head down, moving together Leg descent: press and hold this button, the leg motor starts descending, release this button, the leg motor descending stops LUMBAR RISE: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to rise, release this key, the LUMBAR motor rises and stops. LUMBAR DOWN: Press and hold this key, the LUMBAR motor starts to descend, release this key, the LUMBAR motor descends and stops. If the head massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low -> medium -> high, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Tap this button to turn on the back and leg massager;
Tap this button again to turn off the back and leg massager If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state when it was last turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: Low -> Medium -> High, the default time of 15 minutes to reach the highest intensity of the continuous running . Lower the head massager intensity button, 3 intensities, press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. WAVE button: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state it was in when it was last turned off, this button allows the massager to cycle between continuous-low wave-mid wave-high wave, 4 modes. Press and hold for approx. 5 seconds, the backlight flashes to turn off the massager Decrease the intensity of the foot massager for 3 intensities and press the massager again to turn it off when it reaches the lowest intensity. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function:
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Logical Relationships:
1. Judgment when pressing the foot up and foot down buttons:
1.1. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) and above, the feet can run at any angle 1.2. When the head is at 0 degrees (20mm) ~ -5 degrees (10mm), the foot can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) and below. 33
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 1.3, head in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the foot can only run below the head position
(0-10mm) (eg: head position 7mm, foot position can only be 7mm) (over the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2. Judgment when pressing the head-up and head-down buttons:
2.1, feet at 0 degrees (20mm) or more, the head can only run at 0 degrees (20mm) or more (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) 2.2. When the foot is at 0 (20mm) to -5 degrees (10mm), the head can only run at
-5 degrees (10mm) and above
(Buzzer sounds 2 times over the range) 2.3, foot in -5 degrees (10mm) below, the head can only be in the foot position and above the operation (for example: foot position 7mm, the head position can only be 7mm operation) (beyond the range of the buzzer sounded 2) Negative angle four-motor action logic description 1086_Negative Angle Bed Outside Trailer Motor Motion Logic Motor Lifting Situation Sequence of motor movements unl uck unlucky
(slang) rib glaze hips y rib gla hip ze s
(sla ng) 34 Simult aneou s action in both directi ons Simult aneou s action in both directi ons Rise
(first priority) liter inactivity inactivity liter liter inactivity inactivity capitulate liter capitulate inactivity Rise
(first priority) inactivity inactivity Rise
(first priority) inactivity liter inactivity inactivity capitulate inactivity inactivity liter liter liter liter Descending
(first priority) inactivity inactivity inactivity capitulate inactivity inactivity inactivity Descending
(first priority) capitulate Descending
(first priority) inactivity inactivity capitulate inactivity capitulate inactivity capitulate inactivity inactivity Descending
(first priority) 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity liter liter liter liter Descending
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity Rise
(first priority) inactivity inactivity liter capitulate inactivity inactivity Descending Rise
(first priority)
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) inactivity capitulate inactivity inactivity liter inactivity Rise
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) liter Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) inactivity inactivity capitulate liter inactivity inactivity capitulate Descending 35 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) liter liter liter liter Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) inactivity inactivity
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) inactivity capitulate inactivity inactivity liter inactivity Descending
(first priority) inactivity capitulate inactivity inactivity liter inactivity Rise
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) liter Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) Rise Descending Rise
(first priority)
(first priority)
(first priority) Three
-way simult aneou s action Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate liter liter liter liter inactivity capitulate liter inactivity capitulate Descending
(first priority) inactivity Rise
(first priority) capitulate inactivity inactivity liter inactivity Descending Rise
(first priority)
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) inactivity Descending
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) capitulate inactivity inactivity liter inactivity Descending
(first priority) 36 1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 capitulate inactivity capitulate inactivity Rise
(first priority) liter Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) capitulate inactivity capitulate liter capitulate inactivity capitulate Descending
(first priority) liter Rise
(first priority) Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) capitulate liter liter liter liter liter capitulate Descending Rise
(first priority)
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) liter Descending Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority)
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) capitulate liter capitulate Descending
(first priority) inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity inactivity Four-
way simult aneou s action Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) liter liter liter liter Rise
(first priority) liter Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) capitulate liter capitulate Descending
(first priority) Rise Descending Rise
(first priority)
(first priority)
(first priority) liter Rise Descending Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority)
(first priority)
(first priority) Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) capitulate liter capitulate liter capitulate Descending
(first priority) Rise
(first priority) liter 37 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate capitulate liter liter liter Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority) capitulate liter capitulate Descending
(first priority) Descending Rise
(first priority)
(first priority) liter Descending Rise Descending
(first priority)
(first priority)
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) Descending
(first priority) capitulate liter capitulate Descending
(first priority) 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 key labeling SR69-004 Function (Music Vibrator) Motor one-touch operation to M1 position (with initial value) Repeat function: long press flashlight about 5s, backlight flashes, press M1 within 2s, buzzer sounds 3 times, record all current motor position and massager intensity, mode, light bar or color strip color status to M1.(power off does not clear) Key lock function: long press this button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, lock the remote control keys, press any key except its own remote control backlight flashes three times, this time the remote control keys are not available; long press this button again for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes 3 times, unlock the remote control keys, this time the remote control keys can be used
(Power off and on, remote control stays locked) Regular underbed light:
Press the button to turn on the underbed light, press again to turn off the underbed light (default always on) UBL: Tap to turn on, then press to turn off, remote control has no color switching function, next time you turn on, default to the color of the last time you turned off (default 15 minutes to turn off automatically) The color of the light strip can be used to set the color by APP, and when you set the color, you can turn on the underbed light Neck motor extends, releases to stop (3rd circuit) Neck motor retracts, release stops (3rd circuit) Lumbar motor extends, release stops (4th circuit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 38 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Lumbar motor retracts, release stops (4th circuit) Back motor extends, releases to stop (first circuit) Foot motor extends, releases to stop (second circuit) Back motor retracted, released to stop (first circuit) Foot motor retracts, release stops (second circuit) Flashlight on/off (default 30s). Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight button for 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, enter memorizable mode, release the flashlight, press M1 within 2 seconds, the control box rings 3 times to memorize the current position, if you do not press the memorize position button within 2 seconds, you will exit from the editing and memorizing position mode;
Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight+ FLAT at the same time for about 3s, the backlight flashes 3 times to enter the continuous pressing mode, at this time, all the position buttons enter the continuous pressing mode, release the button motor to stop. Reuse function: press and hold the flashlight + lock key at the same time for about 3S, the backlight flashes 2 times, enter the one key release mode, at this time, all position keys enter the one key release pressure mode, can be reset at the same time the memory location of the memory key to the factory default settings FLAT one-touch reset, all motors retract to minimum travel position,
(power-on does not reset)
(If the massager is on, turn off the massager; without turning off the under-bed light, reset the lumbar and neck motors, then reset the back and leg motors) Enhancement: In Music Follow Mode, pressing this button will enhance the vibration intensity of the Follow Motion, cycling through 0-1-2-3 steps
(default 1 step when entering Music Follow Mode). Bluetooth switch: power on in the Bluetooth off state, the audio prompts
"off Bluetooth" or "Bluetooth off", at this time the Bluetooth device can not be searched for, the music follows the operation area of the key no response Press the button, the bluetooth function is open, (such as the massager is open, close the massager) audio prompts "open bluetooth, wait for the connection" or "Bluetooth on, please wait" at this time to open the cell phone bluetooth, you can Search for Bluetooth devices and connect, connect successfully, the sound prompts "Bluetooth connected successfully" or
"bluetooth connected", play music, the first time you power on the use of the vibrator to the default intensity of the 1-step music with the 39 running Press the button again, the Bluetooth function is turned off, the audio prompts "Bluetooth off" or "Bluetooth off". The Bluetooth function of the device is on, turn off the Bluetooth of the cell phone, the audio prompts "Bluetooth disconnected" or "Bluetooth disconnected". When synchronized: Bluetooth control synchronized on/off If any of the massagers is on, tap the button, massage off (because there is no off function for massager enhancement), the If all massages are off, click the button to turn on all massages, the massager defaults to the last time it was off Music Pause/Play: Tap the button to play the music, operate again to pause the music 28Hz/40Hz: Vibrator 28Hz/40Hz switching (power-on default 28Hz) The operation button is effective only when the array gear is not 0 gear If the head massager is turned on at the end of the head massager, press the button to turn on the massager, the default intensity of the massager is the intensity and mode when it was last turned off;
If the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the head massager, 3 intensities, in the order of: Low - Medium
- High - Off, default time 15 minutes Mode switching: If the massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state of the last time it was turned off, this button enables the massager to cycle between 4 modes:
Continuous - low-speed wave - medium-speed wave - high-speed wave, the intensity of mode switching remains unchanged Press and hold for 5S, the backlight will flash and all massagers will be turned off. If the foot massager is not turned on, press the button to turn on the massager, the massager defaults to the state of the last time it was turned off, if the massager has been turned on, press the button to increase the intensity of the foot massager, 3 intensities, in accordance with the order of: low - medium - high - off, the default time of 15 minutes 16 17 18 19 20 21 Attention:
If the massager (including music followers) is turned on, the motor runs, the intensity of the massager's vibration is reduced to 1 gear, the motor stops to restore the original gear Code pairing mode 1: (Code pairing is performed within 60 seconds of the control box) 1. Keep pressing the [HEAD UP+ FOOT DOWN] button until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control code information. 2. Power on the control box, the control box will be in the code state in 60s, keep pressing the [head down + foot up] button of the remote control until you hear the 40 buzzer ringing 1 sound, it means the code is successful. Code pairing mode 2: (Code pairing after the control box exceeds 60S) 1. Keep pressing the [HEAD UP+ FOOT DOWN] button until the backlight blinks to clear the remote control code information. 2. Press the control box code key, the buzzer sounds 3 times, keep pressing the remote control [head down + foot up], the buzzer sounds 1 time, prompting the code success!
(Default function) Control box wired synchronization function (Continuous press mode does not chase synchronization):
When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization cable, one of the control boxes is controlled and the other control box operates in synchronization with that control box. When controlling the synchronization system with two remotes, it is necessary to pair the codes separately before re-powering and connecting the synchronization cables. Bluetooth grouping:
First confirm that the bluetooth is open, the cell phone bluetooth and control box bluetooth connection, and connect successfully, if you want to team up with the music vibrator from the machine, long press the button "pause + bluetooth switch" button, the backlight flashes, bluetooth into the teaming mode, the sound prompts "waiting for teaming "or "pairing", if prompted "teaming successful , bluetooth connection successful" or "pairing successful If prompted "teaming successful, bluetooth connection successful" or "pairing successful", it suggests successful pairing. If the group is unsuccessful, the sound will indicate "grouping failure" or "pairing failure". Cancel the grouping:
Cancel pairing, long press "Pause + Bluetooth switch" button, the backlight blinks, the audio prompts the host: "team disconnect" or "unpairing complete ", and the sound prompts the host: "team disconnect" or "unpairing complete". If there is no group: play music, only the audio connected to the phone is played If the team is successful: play music, two stereos at the same time Music demo mode:
First open the Bluetooth switch, confirm that the Bluetooth is connected, and then press the key combination "pause + vibration" to enter the built-in music mode, the audio prompts "U disk play" or "USB access The audio prompts "U disk play" or "USB access", automatically play music, open the music with the intensity at the same time open the highest gear (3 gears), such as not recognizing the USB flash drive, it prompts "unrecognized device" or "unrecognized device"; "Pause + with vibration" to enter the Bluetooth music mode, the audio prompts "open Bluetooth, wait for connection, Bluetooth connected successfully" or "Bluetooth on, please wait , bluetooth 41 connected". bluetooth connected". Pause the music, turn on the music with the intensity at the same time open the low gear (1 gear) Note: Music vibrator compatible music format and U disk format: music format support MP3, wav, wma three; U disk partition unit size must be less than 8192 bytes, format support FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, exFAT, does not support NTFS. Note: (default function) 1. Press any button for more than 60s, the remote control will go into hibernation, release and press again to restore the function. 2. When pressing the flashlight button, the remote control enters into sleep time for 30 seconds, and enters into sleep time for 6 seconds when pressing other buttons on the remote control. 3. Control box without power-on reset 4. No reset function for the control box code key. 5. Remote control no operation 5 seconds backlight directly extinguished, into the hibernation reserved function One-button release mode is timed for 15min, then flatten and turn off the massager, press any button that can operate the motor to exit the timer;
Continuous pressing mode has no timer.
(If you are in the SNORE position, the timer starts, and then you click the SNORE command again, the timer has to be reset.) SNORE Caveats:
1. To protect the reliability and safety of the motor and control box, do not switch the keys frequently. 2. For the first time use or accidental power failure during operation, it must be reset and then used again. 3. Prohibit the plugging and unplugging of equipment with electricity, plugging and unplugging with electricity is a violation of the operation, such as accidentally plugged and unplugged with electricity, need to reset and then use 4. After the test, you must use the supporting remote control to restore the factory settings, (flashlight + LOCK (lock)) 42 Stop Snoring Intervention - Functional Standard (for Music Vibrator PCBA) functional function NO Detailed Functional Contents zone block trigger condition Sleep detection band two people in bed to sleep a person in bed to sleep and another person is not in bed Any side of the sleep monitoring belt monitoring band snoring signal, that is, to trigger snoring intervention, the motor position must be in the 0mm flat position Stop snore raise process: run at 50% of the original motor speed to the snore position. Stop Snoring Automatic leveling 15 minutes after raising to snore Motor Action position 1 2 Stop snore leveling process: run at 50% of the original motor speed and lower to the reset position. Up to 3 consecutive stop snoring actions, the control box will stop responding to snoring commands from the sleep 3 Retrigger. monitor until the control box is reset by pressing any button on the remote control (reset after 8 hours if no buttons are operated) 4 Anti-snoring After the Stop Snore intervention, the motor runs to the position Anti snore position. Vibrator Stop 5 Snoring Stop snoring intervention ineffective when vibrator is on Intervention Stop Snoring Interventio n Motorized 6 Stop Snoring Intervention Stop snoring intervention not effective if motor position exceeds >18mm, C65 off-bed sensing not effective 43 RGB Off-Bed Control (for Music Vibrator PCBA) functional function NO Detailed Functional Contents zone block 1 remote control RGB Sensor Light Strip When the underbed light is off, operate the button to turn on the underbed light;
When the underbed light is on, operate the button to turn off the underbed light;
The color of the light strip is set by APP, the remote control has no color switching function. Timing off: after the remote control is turned on, it will be automatically turned off in 15 minutes by default (only RGB is timed, T21 has no timer off).
(Note: the system can be connected to T21 and RGB light strip, through the access detection judgment, the implementation of one of the control logic) 1, can set the color of the light strip. Red, orange, yellow, green, green, blue, purple, white, 8 colors can be set 2 APP control 2, Adjustable light strip brightness, 3 grades adjustment;
3, 4 timing off stalls, 15min, 30min, 60min, always on;
4, away from the bed sensor function switch;
44 3 3 RGB off-bed sensing 1App can set the Motion Activated Function on or off;
2. Both T79 and sleep monitoring band can be used as the bed departure sensor signal;
3When a person leaves the bed, the light signal, T79 or the sleep monitoring belt is the first to sense the priority;
4, C65 sleep monitoring RGB sensor function, can be individually set in the APP on or off (default off) Synchronized state sensing, the strip lights up the corresponding side of the control box to set the color, synchronized there is no sense of the side of the bed does not light control up (such as the need for two infrared sensors are open, you must be two control boxes are open to infrared sensing to be able to) If you turn on the massager or vibrator, away from the bed sensor light is invalid, such as away from the bed sensor inductive light is turned on, after turning on the massager or 4 logic vibrator, can only be manually turned off the underbed relationship light Invalid off-bed sensor light when motor stroke >18mm Full-function remote control (SR69 A0-PCBA) New full-function remote control program Old full function remote control program Bluetooth Function Description (for Music Vibrator PCBA) initial step Scan the code to download the mobile app.(QR code for Android) 45 SR 69_new.hexSR69_old.hex second step Android Download Interface Apple download interface (Apple has no picture yet because it is not on the shelves) 46 fourth step Select the "confirm" button to enter the device selection interface. After all the devices are connected, the system will automatically detect the peripherals, automatic detection is finished, click the
"confirm" button to enter the device operation interface. after the This interface is the device detection interface, if the peripheral is not connected, the display will be "X". Motor Operator Interface Note:
will be displayed only when connected to LEDs, and will not be displayed when connected to RGB. 47 Memory Position Operator Interface Click to manually memorize and save the fixed position of the motor. Click "Erase All Favorites" to restore the factory settings of the fixed location, one-click release mode. Massager control interface, click on the back/leg will automatically drop down to show the current massager gears massager icon, it Click "Add Alarm" to enter the alarm setting interface. 48 Set the time the alarm clock needs to run Click on "Mode" to set the way the alarm runs. Select the date on which the alarm needs to run Can be set to run Monday through Sunday Or click on the slider to the right of
"Single" to set up a single run. Once you've set your settings, click
"Save". 49 After the alarm is saved, the set alarm time and action position will be displayed in the alarm interface Attention:
1. Alarm set time cleared when control box is powered down 2. After the alarm clock responds, only the alarm clock side of the electronic control box responds to the action 3. Alarm motor: motor runs directly into position 4. Alarm clock massager: to the alarm time, head and foot massager at the same time open, low-speed wave run 60S -
medium-speed wave run 60S - high-speed wave run 60S, after the end of the run, the massager stops the action, press any button to interrupt the alarm clock massager run If the first vibration of the massager is not interrupted, then after 5 minutes, the massager continues to alarm reminder, until pressing any button of the remote control to interrupt the massager alarm, otherwise the massager alarm runs once every 5 minutes This screen is only displayed when the RGB is connected. Click the color button to change the color of the RGB light bar Click on the box under "Brightness" to change the brightness of the RGB strip. Select "Time" to change the default off time of the RGB strip. Select "Motion Activated Function". Infrared sensor switch can be set, if set sensor on, the RGB light bar will be turned on automatically after sensing a person 50
(only the connected control box is set) Music Vibrator Control Interface Click follower button, it will automatically drop down to show the music follower gear, click the gear, you can change the follower intensity Add a sleep monitoring system, enter the sleep monitoring interface, which can display the quality of sleep (the device is automatically connected, no need to manually connect) Average heart rate (displayed after data is available) 51 Average respiration (displayed when data is available) Number of physical movements (displayed when data are available) Average number of snores (data to be displayed when available) Click on "Options" to enter the Sensor Belt Settings screen. Click on the "Occupancy Detection Activated RGB" sliding bar on the right side, you can set whether to leave the bed sensing or not, if you set the bed sensing on, then after leaving the bed, the light bar will be turned on automatically (only set the connected control box). Click on "Operation Mode" to set up a single or double bed (only the connected control box is set up). Click on the slider to the right of the
"Anti Snore Function" to activate the anti-snoring intervention (only for the 52 connected control box). Left / Right Snoreing Debug, for temporary debugging, after the official version, these two commands will be canceled. Click "
" in the upper left corner to enter the setting interface Re-selecting peripheral accessories Theme Setting Renameable for Bluetooth devices One-touch release mode Continuous pressing mode Sleep data reminder
(vii) Version information V. System configuration chart 53 Product Specification Sheet Control Box Specification Sheet Control Box Models HJC9N BOM 108680C9G0018 PCBA number 6100C9BB0000 program number H6C0171 12TTC9BB0005 synchronization communication method method Y BT Applicable Motor common thread Wiring Sequence sequence fixed position Y specification code P# pending ****C9-51XX-0027A320-**C9BB0171V10 54
*Because the customer's old program number can not be changed, the new program number and the old program number is only a different name, the content is the same, the specification code for the new program number Remote control specification table Remote Control Models HJSR69 BOM 8SR690001 PCBA number 61SR69A00001 program number 12TTSR69A006 Remote Control Models HJSR69B BOM 8SR69B001 PCBA number 61SR69A00002 program number 12TTSR69A005 Remote Control Models HJSR69B BOM 8SR69B002 PCBA number 61SR69A00002 program number 12TTSR69A004 Remote Control Models HJSR69C BOM 8SR69C001 PCBA number 61SR69A00003 program number 12TTSR69A003 Remote Control Models HJSR69C BOM 8SR69C001 PCBA number 61SR69A00003 program number 12TTSR69A003 Remote Control HJSR69D BOM 8SR69D001 55 Models PCBA number 61SR69A00004 program number 12TTSR69A002 Remote Control Models HJSR69E BOM 8SR69E001 PCBA number 61SR69A00005 program number 12TTSR69A001 Remote Control Models HJSR69F BOM 8SR69F001 PCBA number 61SR69A00006 program number 12TTSR69A000 Remote Control Models HJH55 BOM 108680H550350 PCBA number 61H601A00000 program number 12TTH601A000 Remote Control Models HJH55 BOM PCBA number 610H55BT0000 program number 12TTH55BT002 Remote Control Models HJH92S BOM 10868H92S0004 PCBA number 610H92X10000 program number 12TTH92X1014 Remote Control Models HJH92S BOM 10868H92S0005 PCBA number 610H92X10000 program number 12TTH92X1015 Remote Control Models SR95 BOM H1086-SR95-001 PCBA number 61SR95B00000 program number H6C0024 56 control code P# to be determined** SR95-51XX-00A4BE7C/SR95B00024V10 P# to be determined** SR95-01XX-5726703F/SR95B00119V10 H6C0119 Remote Control Models HJSR81C BOM H1086-SR81C-002 PCBA number 61SR81CA0000 program number H6C0369 specification code Remote Control Models P# to be determined* SR81C-51XX-000D4E32/SR81CA0369V11 HJSR81D BOM H1086-SR81D-002 PCBA number 61SR81CA0000 program number H6C0369 specification code P# to be determined* SR81C-51XX-000E167F/SR81CA0369V11
*Do not leave blank any field that is not required, please cut it out or fill in "N/A". Actuator Specification Sheet Model-Hall-Line 10868A67S0188-Single Hall-Common Line Sequence Sequence Motor-Screw-Gear HJ-T3HA-Tr14*3(p3)-HJA67 Gear with 1 Degree Insert,10 Degree functional division Head 2 Model-Hall-Line 10868A67S0189-Single Hall-Common Line 57 Sequence Sequence Motor-Screw-Gear HJ-T3HA-Tr14*3(p3)-HJA67 Gear with Degree Insert,10 Degree functional division Foot Model-Hall-Line 10868A67S0035-Single Hall-Common Line Sequence Sequence Motor-Screw-Gear HJ-T3HA-Tr14*3(p3)-HJA67 Gear with Degree Insert,10 Degree functional division T Model-Hall-Line 10868A67S0036-Single Hall-Common Line Sequence Sequence Motor-Screw-Gear HJ-T3-Tr14*3(p3)-HJA67 Gear with Insert,10 Degree functional division Degree L 3 4
*Don't leave the column blank if you don't need it, please cut it out or fill in "N/A"; fill in the above actuator master control box when it has a logical relationship or fixed position. Accessory Specification Sheet 58 1 2 3 model number HJM5 Massager typology 1086800M50001 model number HJM5 Massager typology 1086800M50002 model number typology strip
*Do not leave blank any field that is not required, please cut it out or fill in "N/A". Change of curriculum vitae relea ses Date change of Summary of Changes source (of information etc) v1.0 v1.1 V1.2 2022/12/02 Changing the initial value of M1/M2 Customer Request - 1086-22061001 - New Bluetooth Control Boxes Customer Request-1086-22102801-Change SR69 Remote Family One-Touch Release Mode Switching Key Combination 1086-22120202-Modification 200-0050/200-0061 Control Box Memory Position M1 / M2 Parameters V1.3 2022/12/17 Add HJH92 remote control Customer Request-1086-22121401-New 59 V1.4 2023/03/24 Modification of memory motor action logic relationships V1.5 2023.9.21 Add SR95 remote control v1.6 2024.1.12 V1.7 2024.4.7 Add SR81 remote control, change control box new key value, new program number 1. The flashlight auto-off time is modified to 30 seconds;
2. position memory All interfaces changed to 5 memory positions + FLAT interface Tier 1 Remote Family-H92 Remote Control Program and Firmware Customer Requirements-1086-23032401-Modify the program related to the sequence of motor action of Control Box 200-0061 Customer Request-1086-23041101-New Screen Remote SR95 1086-23122801-Better Sleep Electronics New BT Control Box Program Customer Request-1086-2024032001-SR95 Remote Control UI Modification V1.8 2024.4.25 1:
Modification:
resting hibernation time 2: lock status popup logic Customer Request-1086-2024032001-SR95 Remote Control UI Modification V1.9 2024.5.10 Changing the remote control sleep time Add SLEEP 1.2.3 key value, remove SR81E remote control v2.0 2024.6.7 Changing the function of FLAT-2 Change SR95 lock status v2.1 2024.7.8 Add FLAT3 function V2.2 2024.7.17 V2.3 2024.8.30 Modify the hibernation time of different interfaces of SR95 UI 60 1086-24042301-Modifying the remote control Sleep Timer and upgrading the remote control program version number 1086-24041801 - Creating a new Better Sleep remote and replacing an existing one 1086-24041801 - Creating a new Better Sleep remote and replacing an existing one Customer needs-1086-2024032001-SR95 remote control UI modification 20035-24062801-New key combination to realize FLAT3 function and change the long press motor down reset hall number time from 1.25 seconds to 300 milliseconds. Customer Requirements-20035-24071501-Lock Function Setting Customer Requirements-20035-24082001-SR95 Hibernation and Backlight Off Time Change Test Pictures New program master - old program slave Old program master - new program slave functionality Old-New Control Box New - old control box New - New Control Box OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK model number Test Control Remote SR69 12TTSR69A006 H92 12TTH92X1015 SR81C H6C0369
(negative angle) Caution:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential 61 installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 62
| various | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 |
HJSR96 Ble Product Catalog Remote control function description Key label Function Full lock function: press for about 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the buzzer rings three times, all functions of the entire remote control are locked, power off and power on to keep the state before power off (APP function is unavailable); Press and hold again for about 5 seconds, the backlight blinks, and the buzzer rings three times. After unlocking, all functions are available Half lock function: press the lock + pause for about 5 seconds at the same time, the 1 backlight flashes, and the buzzer sounds 2 times. The remote control enters the semi-lock state, and only locks the function of the music oscillator (3 to 9 keys);
Press and hold again for about 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the buzzer sounds twice to unlock the function After the full lock buzzer rings three times, press any key (except the lock key), the buzzer rings three times to remind: the half lock buzzer rings two times, press the music key part, the buzzer rings two times to remind Under-bed light - seven-color light, press 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8, one color at a time, cycle
(the first color is white), long press 3S backlight flashing, turn off the under-bed light, default 5min automatic off (lock control box function, remote control or send 2 instructions) Follow-up enhancement: In the music follow-up mode, press this button, will increase the vibration intensity of the follow-up, according to the 0-1-2-3 gear cycle
(enter the music follow-up mode default 1 gear) 3 Press the intensity when massaging below 4 5 6 7 8 Intensity lights should also be lit, leg and back lights at the same time, first class back and leg lights one light, second gear is two each, third gear is three each, the lamp is white In music follow up mode, press this button to switch up the track Music Pause/Play: In music follow mode, press this button to pause or continue playing music In music follow up mode, press this button to switch down the track In the music follow-up mode, press this button to increase the speaker volume, a total of 15 gears, the highest after the 15 gears, the vibration intensity is not affected Bluetooth switch: When the device is powered on and Bluetooth is off, the Bluetooth device cannot be searched, and the button in the music follow-up operation area does not respond Press this button, and the Bluetooth function will be enabled. (if the massager is on, turn off the massager.) The audio prompt "Bluetooth on, please wait" will be displayed at this time to turn on the Bluetooth of the mobile phone, and the Bluetooth device can be searched and connected. Play music, when the first power on use, the vibrator at the default 1 gear intensity for music follow-up operation Press the button again, the Bluetooth function is turned off, and the sound prompts
"Bluetooth off". 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 In the music follow-up mode, press this button to reduce the horn volume and keep it at the lowest setting without affecting the vibration intensity Back up, release to stop Back down, release to stop Waist support up, release stop. Lower waist support, release to stop. Feet up, release to stop. Foot down, release to stop Press the flashlight on/off switch One-button reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position, power-on reset The motor runs to the M position with one key (no initial value). 18 Multiplexing function: FLAT+M, backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record the current motor position to M (power off does not clear) The motor runs to the SNORE position (with initial value) with one click. Multiplexing function: FLAT+SNORE, backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record the current motor position to SNORE
(power off to clear) 19 The motor runs to the ZG position (with initial value) with one click. 20 Multiplexing function: FLAT+ZG, backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record current motor position to ZG (power off clear) Head massager enhancement: Press the button, if the head massager does not start, start the head massager and enter "CONSTANT" mode; If the head massage 21 motor is started, increase the vibration intensity of the massager, 123 off, cycle switching (default 30 minutes off) (the upper indicator light is white, 1 gear: 1 light, 2 gear: 2 lights, 3 gear: 3 lights) Function button: massage motor working time timing, respectively set 10min, 22 20min,30min. The timing time is displayed through the indicator light, which is white Press and hold for 3S, the backlight flashes, and turn off the massager Mode switching --CONSTANT-PULSE-WAVE (When switching mode, massager restores to intensity 1) The massager can be opened, and the massage motor mode can be adjusted. 23 Press this button, and the massage motor will enter the "PULSE" mode. After pressing the button again, the massage motor will enter the "WAVE" mode. CONSTANT sound a buzzer rang, PULSE loud buzzer two, WAVE buzzer rang three times, but also shows the current intensity of color: light in blue: CONSTANT:
10 min, PULSE: 20 min, WAVE: 30 min Foot massager enhancement: Press the button, if the foot massager does not start, start the foot massager and enter "CONSTANT" mode; If the foot massage motor is 24 started, increase the vibration intensity of the massager, 123 off, cycle switching (default 30 minutes off) (the upper indicator light is white, 1 gear: 1 light, 2 gear: 2 lights, 3 gear: 3 lights) 25 FLAT+ underbed light, control light plate switch. Coding method:
[Remote control head rise + foot rise + control box code key] Buzzer sounds, indicating successful code.
* Do not connect the synchronous line when the code is on, after the code can be connected to the normal synchronous line, remember!!!
* During code alignment, if the synchronization line is connected, the buzzer of the control box rings rapidly, indicating an exception. Disconnect the synchronization line and retry code alignment
* The control box has a reset function for the code key, and all the motors return to the minimum position.
* The control box is powered on and reset, all motors are reset at the same time, and the reset process cannot be interrupted by any key.
* When the code must be a single control box all accessories must be connected to the code operation, the code can be successfully carried out after the remote control and APP control, remember, otherwise the function will cause abnormal!!!
* When the motor is running, the music oscillator is lowered to first gear, and the music oscillator is restored to its original gear after the motor is finished running Remote control mutual learning function (A: learn remote control, B: learn remote control) :
1. B learns A: Press and hold B's head down + foot down for 5s, and the flashlight is on. Press A's head up + foot up within 10S. 2, learning function release: long press B's head rise + foot drop 5s, flashlight light, indicating successful release. 3. When the remote control that has been successfully learned is powered on again, the flashlight flashes, indicating that the remote control has been successfully learned. At this time, the remote control can no longer pair the code, and the learning function needs to be lifted to pair the code Bluetooth team description: (APP does not have this function) First press the Bluetooth on button to confirm that the Bluetooth is on, connect the Bluetooth of the mobile phone to the Bluetooth of the control box, and the connection is successful. If you want to team with the music oscillator of the slave phone, long press the "volume + and volume -" button for about 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, the Bluetooth enters the team mode, and the audio prompts "pairing"; If "pairing successful" is displayed, pairing is successful To cancel pairing, long press the "Volume + and volume -" button for about 5 seconds, the backlight flashes, and the audio prompt "unpairing complete" is displayed to cancel pairing successfully Control box wired synchronization function: (catch up) When two control boxes are connected with a synchronization line, one of the control boxes is controlled, and the other control box runs synchronously with the control box. FCC Warning:
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
| various | Users Manual | 178.32 KiB | October 29 2024 |
HJSR96B Ble Product Catalog Remote control function description 1 Key label Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Short press release runs to SNORE position (with initial value). Multiplex function: (FLAT+SNORE), backlight flashes, buzzer sounds, record current motor position to SNORE position. (Power off to clear). Short press release run to ZG position (with initial value). Multiplexing function: (FLAT+ZG), backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record the current motor position to the ZG position. (Power off to clear). Under bed light on/off (default: 15min). Short press to release run to TV position (with initial value). Multiplexing function: (FLAT+TV), backlight flashing, buzzer sound, record the current motor position to the TV position. (Power off to clear). Neck up, release to stop Neck drop, release to stop Back up, release to stop Lower back; Release stop Waist out, release stop Waist retract, release to stop Feet rise; Release stop Foot down, release to stop Turn on/increase the strength of the head massager, "CONSTANT"
mode, 3 strengths, the default time is 30 minutes, when the maximum strength is reached, press the massager again to close. (The upper indicator light is white, 1 gear: 1 light, 2 gear: 2 lights, 3 gear: 3 lights) Function button: massage motor working time timing, respectively set 10min, 20min,30min. The timing time is displayed through the indicator light, which is white Press and hold for 3S, the backlight flashes, and turn off the massager Mode switching CONSTANT - PULSE - the WAVE light in blue:
CONSTANT: 10 min, PULSE: 20 min, WAVE: 30 min Turn on/increase the massager strength, "CONSTANT" mode, 3 strengths, the default time is 30 minutes, when the maximum strength is reached, press the massager again to close. (The upper indicator light is white, 1 gear: 1 light, 2 gear: 2 lights, 3 gear: 3 lights) Coding method:
[Remote control head rise + foot rise + control box code key] Buzzer sounds, indicating successful code
* The control box has a reset function for the code key
* The control box is powered on and reset, all motors are reset at the same time, and the reset process cannot be interrupted by any key 2 Remote control mutual learning function (A: learn remote control, B: learn remote control) :
1. B learns A: Press and hold B's head down + foot down for 5s, and the flashlight is on. Press A's head up + foot up within 10S. 2, learning function release: long press B's head rise + foot drop 5s, flashlight light, indicating successful release. FCC Warning:
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. is no guarantee 3
| various | Users Manual | 252.35 KiB | October 29 2024 |
HJSR96C Ble Product Catalog Remote control function description 1 Key label Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Short press release runs to SNORE position (with initial value). Multiplex function: (FLAT+SNORE), backlight flashes, buzzer sounds, record current motor position to SNORE position. (Power off to clear). Short press release run to ZG position (with initial value). Multiplexing function: (FLAT+ZG), backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record the current motor position to the ZG position. (Power off to clear). Short press to release the run to the LOUNGE position (with initial value). Reuse function: (FLAT+LOUNGE), backlight flashes, buzzer sounds, record the current motor position to the LOUNGE position.
(power off to clear) Short press to release run to TV position (with initial value). Multiplexing function: (FLAT+TV), backlight flashing, buzzer sound, record the current motor position to the TV position. (Power off to clear). One click reset, all motors retracted to the minimum stroke position. Short press release runs to M1 position (no initial value). Multiplexing function: (FLAT+M1), backlight flashing, buzzer ringing, record current motor position to M1 position. (Power off does not clear) Back up, release to stop Lower back; Release stop Back/foot rise at the same time, release to stop Back/foot drop at the same time, release to stop Feet rise; Release stop Foot down, release to stop Turn on/increase the strength of the head massager, "CONSTANT"
mode, 3 strengths, the default time is 30 minutes, when the maximum strength is reached, press the massager again to close. (The upper indicator light is white, 1 gear: 1 light, 2 gear: 2 lights, 3 gear: 3 lights) Function button: massage motor working time timing, respectively set 10min, 20min,30min. The timing time is displayed through the indicator light, which is white Press and hold for 3S, the backlight flashes, and turn off the massager Mode switching CONSTANT - PULSE - the WAVE light in blue:
CONSTANT: 10 min, PULSE: 20 min, WAVE: 30 min Turn on/increase the massager strength, "CONSTANT" mode, 3 strengths, the default time is 30 minutes, when the maximum strength is reached, press the massager again to close. (The upper indicator light is white, 1 gear: 1 light, 2 gear: 2 lights, 3 gear: 3 lights) Coding method:
2
[Remote control head rise + foot rise + control box code key] Buzzer sounds, indicating successful code
* The control box has a reset function for the code key
* The control box is powered on and reset, all motors are reset at the same time, and the reset process cannot be interrupted by any key Remote control mutual learning function (A: learn remote control, B: learn remote control) :
1. B learns A: Press and hold B's head down + foot down for 5s, and the flashlight is on. Press A's head up + foot up within 10S. 2, learning function release: long press B's head rise + foot drop 5s, flashlight light, indicating successful release. FCC Warning:
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 3
| various | Users Manual | 247.87 KiB | October 29 2024 |
HJ8258 BLE Module datasheet Latest version|V1.0 Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc About Datasheet The specification of HJ8258 module provides an introduction of the basic functions of WLT8258 module, including the electrical specification, RF performance, pin size, and design of reference schematic diagram, etc. Readers can refer to this document to have a detailed understanding of the overall functional parameters of the module application, Revision History
**Version information management**
V1.0 time
*Update record*
*editors*
2020.09.18 The initial release directory About Datasheet Revision History directory 1.Summary 1.1.Functions 1.2.Application fields 2.2Electrical specifications 3.The Bluetooth specification 4.Pin description 4.1.Pin assignment 4.2.4.2 UART interface 4.3.Pin definition 5.Reference design 5.1.Reference schematic 5.2.Matters needing attention 6.Reflux parameter 7. Packing size 8.Regulatory Module Integration Instructions 1.Summary HJ8258 is a Bluetooth low energy transmission module. This module is mainly used in data communication of Internet of things, and data acquisition and control are realized through rich peripheral interface. In the transmission mode, the user's product can quickly complete the docking with the module, and communicate with the mobile device to achieve intelligent control and management of the product. HJ8258 is based on the Bluetooth low energy 5.0 protocol and can be used for point to point data transparent transmission and encryption transmission, users do not need to care about the transmission protocol, just a simple set up can be communication. The module supports Ble (Up to Bluetooth 5.0) , Ble Mesh. Built-in 512kB FLASH SUPPORTS DYNAMIC STACK and protocol Profile configurations, and the product features can be configured via software, providing the ultimate flexibility. At the same Time Support Hardware Ota upgrade, allowing convenient product function launch and upgrade. Figure 1-1HJ8258 module 1.1.Functions Built-in high performance 32-bit MCU, 512KB Flash, 64KB SRAM Comply with Bluetooth 5.0 standard, RF link data up to 2Mbps Transmission power: maximum +2.5dBm Receiving sensitivity
-96dBm@BLE 1Mbps
-93dBm@ BLE 2Mbps mode
-99dBm@ BLE 500kbps mode
-101dBm@ BLE 125kbps mode Support UART interface Support AT instruction Support APP parameter configuration Onboard high performance PCB antenna Stamp hole pin, easy and reliable welding Super small package: 12.6x20mm Operating temperature: -40~+85 HJ8258 module only needs to connect VCC, GND, TX and RX to complete data transmission function. It also supports the use of the AT instruction to modify the default name and other related parameters (see the HJ8258 user manual for details). 1.2.Application fields Personal equipment Wearable, mouse and keyboard, remote control toys;
Retail logistics Electronic shelf label, cold chain transport;
Smart home Lighting, sensor, intelligent lock, remote control, lawn mower, voice control, intelligent printer, lift table and chair;
Industrial control Security monitoring, special printers, medical equipment;
2.2Electrical specifications Table2-1Maximum rated parameter Item Symbol The power supply voltage Pin input voltage Pin output voltage Storage temperature Welding temperature Note:
VDD Vin Vout Tstr Tsld Min
-0.3
-0.3 0
-65
Max 3.6 VDD+0.3 VDD 150 260 Unit V V V C C 1. The listed electrical characteristics are target specifications for reference only. Some data may be updated based on actual test results. 2. The voltage value shown is based on GND in the module. Any voltage exceeding the maximum rating may cause permanent damage to the equipment. Table2-2Recommended operating conditions Item Symbol Min Typ. Max Unit The power supply voltage VDD 1.8 3.3 Power supply voltage rise time (from 1.6v to 2.8v) TR Operating temperature range Topr
-40
3.6 10 85 V ms C Table2-3Working current(VDD=3.3V, T=25) Item Sym. Min Typ. Max Unit Condition RX current IRx TX current ITx Sleep patterns
5.3 4.8 1.2
mA Whole Module Working Whole Module Working @0dBm With DCDC enable mA uA Table2-4 Broadcast Current (VDD= 3.3v, T=25,2.5dBm) Broadcast Interval 100ms 200ms 300ms 1 Channel 3 Channel 147 266 74 98 31 54 1s 16 28 2s 9 18 Unit uA uA Table2-5 Connecting current (VDD= 3.3v, T=25,2.5dBm) Interval 20ms 50ms 100ms 200s 500s Current 643 263 134 68 43 Unit uA Table2-6Pin input/output characteristics(VDD=3.3V, T=25) Item Sym. Min Typ. Max Unit Condition Input high level Input low level VIH VIL 0.7VDD VSS Output high level VOH 0.9VDD Output low level VOL VSS
VDD 0.3VDD VDD 0.1VDD V V V V Table2-7RF performance parameter Item Sym. Min Typ. Max Unit Condition Frequency range Data rate Freq. 2380
MHz 1MHz programmable frequency interval BLE/2.4G Proprietary 1Mbps, 250kHz deviation BLE/2.4G Proprietary 2Mbps, 500kHz deviation BLE 125kbps, 250kHz deviation BLE 500kbps, 250kHz deviation 3.The Bluetooth specification Table3-1 BLE 1Mbps RF_Rx performance(250kHz deviation) Item Sym. Min Typ. Max Unit Condition The sensitivity 1Mbps
-96
dBm Frequency offset error Same frequency suppression Image reject Intra-band blocking rejectionmodulation interference
1 MHz offset 2 MHz offset
>=3 MHz offset
-250
+300 KHz
-11 37 1/3 37/39 42
Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm dB dB dB dB dB Table3-2BLE 1Mbps RF_Tx performance Item Sym. Min. Typ. Max. Unit Condition Maximum output Minimum output Programmable power output range 20dB modulation bandwidth
55
2.5
-45 55 2.5
55
dBm dBm dBm MHz Table3-3BLE 2Mbps RF_Rx performance(500kHz deviation) Item Sym. Min. Typ. Max. Unit Condition The sensitivity 2Mbps
-93
dBm Frequency offset error Same frequency suppression Image reject Intra-band blocking rejectionmodulation interference
2 MHz offset 4 MHz offset
>=4 MHz offset
-300
+200 KHz
-10 25 6/6 39/38 42
Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm dB dB dB dB dB Table3-4BLE 2Mbps RF_Tx performance Item Sym. Min. Typ. Max. Unit Condition Maximum output Minimum output Programmable power output range 20dB modulation bandwidth
55
2.5
-45 55 1.4
55
dBm dBm dB MHz Table3-5BLE 500kbps RF_Rx performance(250kHz deviation) Item Sym. Min. Typ. Max. Unit Condition The sensitivity 500kbps
-99
dBm Frequency offset error Same frequency suppression Image reject Intra-band blocking rejectionmodulation interference
1 MHz offset 2 MHz offset
>=3 MHz offset
-150
+50 KHz
-1 42 34/36 42/42 42
Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm dB dB dB dB dB Table3-6BLE 500kbps RF_Tx performance Item Sym. Min. Typ. Max. Unit Condition Maximum output Minimum output Programmable power output range 20dB modulation bandwidth
55
2.5
-45 55 2.5
55
dBm dBm dB MHz Table3-7BLE 125kbps RF_Rx performance(250kHz deviation) Item Sym. Min. Typ. Max. Unit Condition The sensitivity 125kbps
-101
dBm Frequency offset error Same frequency suppression Image reject Intra-band blocking rejectionmodulation interference
1 MHz offset 2 MHz offset
>=3 MHz offset
-150
+50 KHz
-3 42 32/34 42/42 42
Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm Received signal strength
-67dBm dB dB dB dB dB Table3-8BLE 125kbps RF_Tx performance Item Sym. Min. Typ. Max. Unit Condition Maximum output Minimum output Programmable power output range 20dB modulation bandwidth
55
2.5
-45 55 2.5
55
dBm dBm dB MHz 4.Pin description 4.1.Pin assignment Figure 4-1module pin diagram Note: figure 4-1 pin functions can be redefined by pin reuse 4.2.4.2 UART interface The module supports UART (universal asynchronous transceiver) and realizes full duplex transmission and reception through TX and RX interfaces. Support hardware flow control RTS and CTS. Figure 4- 2UART communication 4.3.Pin definition PIN #
Pin name Type describe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 PD<2>
Digital I/O SPI_CN/I2S_LR/PWM3/PD<2>
PD<3>
Digital I/O PWM1_N/I2S_SDI/7816_TRX/PD<3>
PD<4>
Digital I/O SWM/I2S_SDO/PWM2_N/PD<4>
PD<7>
Digital I/O SPI_CK/I2S_BCK/7816_TRX/PD<7>
PA<0>
Digital I/O DMIC_DI/PWM0_N/UART_RX/PA<0>
PA<1>
Digital I/O DMIC_CLK/7816_CLK/I2S_CLK/PA<1>
TX RX 3V3 GND 3V3 SWS GND RX TX Digital I/O PWM4/UART_TX/ATSEL2/lc_comp_ain<1>/sar_aio<1>/PB<1>
Digital I/O PWM1/UART_RX/I2C_SCK/XC32K_I/PGA_N1/PC<3>
POWER 3.3V Power Supply POWER Ground POWER 3.3V Power Supply Digital I/O SWS/UART_RTS/PA<7>
POWER Ground Digital I/O PWM1/UART_RX/I2C_SCK/XC32K_I/PGA_N1/PC<3>
Digital I/O PWM4/UART_TX/ATSEL2/lc_comp_ain<1>/sar_aio<1>/PB<1>
PC<1>
Digital I/O I2C_SCK/PWM1_N/PWM0/PGA_N0/PC<1>
PB<4>
Digital I/O SDM_P0/PWM4/lc_comp_ain<4>/sar_aio<4>/PB<4>
PB<5>
Digital I/O SDM_N0/PWM5/lc_comp_ain<5>/sar_aio<5>/PB<5>
PB<6>
Digital I/O SDM_P1/SPI_DI/UART_RTS/lc_comp_ain<6>/sar_aio<6>/PB<6>
PB<7>
Digital I/O SDM_N1/SPI_DO/UART_RX/lc_comp_ain<7>/sar_aio<7>/PB<7>
PC<0>
Digital I/O I2C_SDA/PWM4_N/UART_RTS/PGA_P0/PC<0>
NC NC NC PC<2>
Digital I/O PWM0/7816_TRX/I2C_SDA/XC32K_O/PGA_P1/PC<2>
PC<4>
Digital I/O PWM2/UART_CTS/PWM0_N/sar_aio<8>/BIAS/PC<4>
RESET RESET Power on reset, active low GND POWER Ground Note: All digital IOs can be used as GPIOs with configurable pull-up/pull-down resistors. 5.Reference design 5.1.Reference schematic Figure 5-1 Top View (Seen from Top) Bottom View (Seen from Bottom) Figure 5-2: Module thickness Module outline dimensions (including process edges) Antenna Position Dimension Length (X) 11.50 0.3mm Width (Y) 16.40 0.3 mm Length (X) 11.20 mm 0.15 mm Width (Y) 4.34 mm 0.15 mm PCB Thickness Height (H) 0.80 0.05 mm Total thickness of module (including shielding case) Height (H) 2.50 0.1 mm Total thickness of module (including shielding case) Height (H) 1.67 0.05 mm Table5-1 Module design dimensions 5.2.Matters needing attention Bluetooth working at 2.4GHz frequency, should try to avoid the impact of various factors on wireless transceiver, pay attention to the following points:
Avoid using metal in the product shell that surrounds the module. If the shell is metal, consider using an external antenna. Metal screws inside the product should be away from the RF part of the module. To maximize RF performance, the user motherboard recommendations:
layout should follow the following Antenna clearance area: the user mainboard located directly below the module antenna area shall not have any copper foil wiring (including power supply, ground and signal layer). 1) Module position: the module should ideally be placed in the corner of the user's main board, and the PCB antenna is located at the far end of the main board. This position minimizes the clearance area of the antenna. Refer to the definition of antenna clearance area below Figure 5- 3Antenna Keep out 6.Reflux parameter Backflow parameters can be set as follows:
Figure 6- 1reflux recommendation curve Temperature range Preheat zone(<150) Time 60-120S Uniform temperature zone(150-200) 60-120S Recirculation zone(>217) 40-60S Key parameters Ramp up rate:2S Ramp up rate:<1S Peak:240-260 Cooling zone Ramp down rate:1/sSlope4/s Table6- 1recommended reflux parameters 7. Packing size The HJ8258 module adopts taping package by default. Taping dimensions are as follows:
Reel dimensions are as follows 8.Regulatory Module Integration Instructions List of applicable FCC rules This device complies with part 15.247 of the FCC Rules. Limited module procedures Not applicable Summarize the specific operational use conditions This module can be applied in remote control toys, sports and fitness sensors , health sensors, mobile accessories as well as smart home. The input voltage to the module should be nominally 1.8-3.6 V DC typical value 3.3V DC and the ambient temperature of the module should not exceed 85. Trace antenna designs Not applicable RF exposure considerations This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment .If the device built into a host as a portable usage the additional RF exposure evaluation may be required as specified by 2.1093. Antennas This module using PCB antennas with maximum gain is 3 dBi . Label and compliance information The outside of final products that contains this module device must display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as:"Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID:
2AJJGHJ8258 " Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. Information on test modes and additional testing requirements a) The modular transmitter has been fully tested by the module grantee on the required number of channels modulation types and modes it should not be necessary for the host installer to re-test all the available transmitter modes or settings. It is recommended that the host product manufacturer installing the modular transmitter perform some investigative measurements to confirm that the resulting composite system does not exceed the spurious emissions limits or band edge limits (e.g. where a different antenna may be causing additional emissions). b) The testing should check for emissions that may occur due to the intermixing of emissions with the other transmitters digital circuitry or due to physical properties of the host product (enclosure). This investigation is especially important when integrating multiple modular transmitters where the certification is based on testing each of them in a stand-alone configuration. It is important to note that host product manufacturers should not assume that because the modular transmitter is certified that they do not have any responsibility for final product compliance. c) If the investigation indicates a compliance concern the host product manufacturer is obligated to mitigate the issue. Host products using a modular transmitter are subject to all the applicable individual technical rules as well as to the general conditions of operation in Sections 15.5 15.15 and 15.29 to not cause interference. The operator of the host product will be obligated to stop operating the device until the interference has been corrected The HJ8258 module is based on TLSR8258 chip .support standard Bluetooth 5.0 commands. For the testing module on your product, user can refer to specification of the Bluetooth system on how to configure and evaluate the module. This specification can also be found on the official Bluetooth website:
https://www.bluetooth.org/enus/specification/adoptedspecifications. Additional testing Part 15 subpart B disclaimer The final host / module combination need to be evaluated against the FCC Part 15B criteria for unintentional radiators in order to be properly authorized for operation as a Part 15 digital device . The host integrator installing this module into their product must ensure that the final composite product complies with the FCC requirements by a technical assessment or evaluation to the FCC rules including the transmitter operation and should refer to guidance in KDB 996369. Frequency spectrum to be investigated For host products with certified modular transmitter the frequency range of investigation of the composite system is specified by rule in Sections 15.33(a)(1) through (a)(3) or the range applicable to the digital device as shown in Section 15.33(b)(1) whichever is the higher frequency range of investigation. Operating the host product When testing the host product all the transmitters must be operating. The transmitters can be enabled by using publicly-available drivers and turned onso the transmitters are active. In certain conditions it might be appropriate to use a technology-specific call box (test set) where accessory devices or drivers are not available. When testing for emissions from the unintentional radiator the transmitter shall be placed in the receive mode or idle mode if possible. If receive mode only is not possible then the radio shall be passive (preferred) and/or active scanning. In these cases this would need to enable activity on the communication BUS (i.e. PCIe SDIO USB) to ensure the unintentional radiator circuitry is enabled. Testing laboratories may need to add attenuation or filters depending on the signal strength of any active beacons (if applicable) from the enabled radio(s). See ANSI C63.4 ANSI C63.10 and ANSI C63.26 for further general testing details.The product under test is placed into a normal paired' mode with another BLE device as per the normal intended use of the product (for example transferring data). FCC Statement Any Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The module is limited to OEM installation ONLY. The OEM integrator is responsible for ensuring that the end user has no manual instruction to remove or install module.
| various | Users Manual | 751.92 KiB | April 22 2025 |
| various | Internal Photos | 918.80 KiB | January 26 2024 / January 28 2024 |
49.5 Lable_Location Richmat Node! HiSR32 Ble Cortans FCC ID 2ALIGHLE2S8 is device comple wih Pat 15 of he FOC Res.
(Operation is subject othe folowing to condtons: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must acept any interference recewved including interference that may cause undesred pectin.
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 69.11 KiB | October 10 2023 |
167 27.3 49.5 Loble Location Richmat Mode HISR228 Ble Cora FCC 2AuGHuE288 Ths deve amples wih Pat 15 he FOC Rules. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) ths device may not cause haf erence a2) this device mes ace any erence eee cng etree that nay cause deed eration
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 65.84 KiB | October 10 2023 |
167 27.3 Loble Location Richmat Node HiSR22C Be Contains FOC 2ANCHRSS Ths dee cps wi Pat 15 he FCC Rules.
(Operation is subject tothe folowing two condtons: (1) ths device may not cause harmful ineerence, and (2) this device must accep any intererence receved, incing interference hat may cause undesred operation
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 68.23 KiB | October 10 2023 |
19.7 0 Lable Location Sted INCORPORATED PN: 190-0111 Model: HJSR77 Ble recocnizen COMPONENT Contains FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 SW PIN:A.12TTSR77A001(v1.0) ll us Made in China Conforms to UL st 962 InterteK certified to cSA 5006684 standard C22.2 No. 68
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 1.94 MiB | October 10 2023 |
19.7 00 Lable Location Ss '
Lip 6 Hudl, pepicneat INCORPORATED A eee x:
h 4, ae, tet IKE iy PN: 190-0110 Model: HJSR77B Ble IZED COMPONENT Contains FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 SW PIN:A.12TTSR77A002(v1.0) c Made in China
). sro" _Conforms to UL Intarta std. 962 Intertek Certified to CSA 5006684 standard C22.2 No. 68
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 1.95 MiB | October 10 2023 |
Richmat Model:HJSR96 Ble Contains FCC ID:2AJJGHJ8258 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC. Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Richmat Model:HJSR96B Ble Contains FCC ID:2AJJGHJ8258 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Richmat Model:HJSR96C Ble Contains FCC ID:2AJJGHJ8258 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 1.55 MiB | October 29 2024 |
198 4 -
Richmat Model: T87-L-2-S-XX Contains FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired L operation.
) Lable Location ud
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 139.70 KiB | July 27 2026 |
Richmat Model:HJSR69G Ble Contains FCC ID:2AJJGHJ8258 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 698.80 KiB | April 22 2025 |
Richmat Model:HJC18N Ble Contains FCC ID:2AJJGHJ8258 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (4) this device may not cause harmful interference, and {2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 138.75 KiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 |
| Richmat Model:HJCQN Bie
Contains FCC ID:2AJJGHJ8258 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (4) this device may not cause harmful interference, and {2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 132.38 KiB | April 14 2025 / April 15 2025 |
8 NR 8 8 3 5 0z os.ov os 09 02 08 06 O0lor 02 0 or 0s 09 o 08 06 002 LLL A LR a Tes CP 1 a HALT]
DE QQEO6 08 OZ 09 OS Op O Oz OL 00296 68 OZ 09 0S Ob OF oz 01 ggi.06 08 O24 09 os ce 0 02 OL O9181Sa Isog Ob OF ae @ oto 08 Re 09 0S OF o oz 01 00206 @ 02 ce ov of % 01 00406 08 OZ 09 0S Oy OF 02 ot ii told dieldrin dit attend elyttuit Richmat Item No.: HJC32L-E-0-1-1-1-650-1-B-DZC11-01 Input:100-240V AC, Max.5.2A, 50/60 Hz Output: DC 24V Duty Cycle: 10%,Max.2min ON/18min OFF Contains FCC ID:2AJJGHJ8258 NOT TO BE OPENED BY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON CT en c H50010-C32L-XXX sscoguze
@b. Conforms to UL Std. 962 SN32LC260600001 MMoosssn Sorted to CSA
| various | ID Label/Location Info | 264.71 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Authority to Act as Agent Date: August 7, 2026 American Certification Body, Inc. 6731 Whittier Avenue Suite C110 McLean, VA 22101 To Whom It May Concern:
______Intertek Testing Service (Shanghai FTZ) Co., Ltd______ is authorized to act on our behalf, until otherwise notified, for applications to American Certification Body, Inc. (ACB). We certify that we are not subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge (47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. Thank you, Agency Agreement Expiration Date: _____August 6, 2027 _____ By:
Title:
(Signature1) Certification engineer On behalf of:
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc.
(Company Name) Telephone:
+86 532 80635999 Chongjie Yuan
(Print name) 041521-14
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 111.20 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Certification Application Attestation Statements Date: August 7, 2026 American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue Suite 300 Falls Church, VA 22046 To Whom It May Concern:
Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(i) ______Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc.______ certifies that as of the date of the application the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment1 prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. If the equipment for which the applicant seeks authorization is produced by any of the entities identified on the current Covered List, including affiliates or subsidiaries of the named companies, the applicant must include an explanation on why the equipment is not covered equipment. Additional Explanation: <N/A>
Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(ii) ______Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc.______ (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of this application, the applicant - is / - is not identified on the Covered List (as a specifically named entity or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates see KDB 986446 Question 5) as an entity producing covered equipment. The applicant also certifies that the device does not have cybersecurity and/or anti-virus software produced by Kaspersky Lab, Inc or any of its successors and assignees identified on the covered list installed on the device, nor will it be installed by the applicant at any time after certification. Thank you, By:
(Signature2) _______Chongjie Yuan_______
(Print name) Title:
______Certification engineer______ Company:
_Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc_ Telephone: +86 532 80635999 __________________________ 1 - The Commissions Covered List is published by the Public Safety and Homeland Security Bureau and posted on the Commissions website. This Covered List, which is periodically updated, identifies particular equipment, produced by particular entities, that constitutes covered equipment. https://www.fcc.gov/supplychain/coveredlist . 2 - Letters must be placed on appropriate letterhead. 092723-17 rev 10
| various | Attestation Statements | 206.65 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Request for Confidentiality Date: August 7, 2026 Subject: Confidentiality Request for: ___FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258____ Pursuant to FCC 47 CFR 0.457(d) and 0.459 and/or IC RSP-100, Section 12.4, the applicant requests that a part of the subject application(s) be held confidential. Type of Confidentiality Requested Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Exhibit Permanent Block Diagrams
--------------------------- External Photos Permanent *1 Internal Photos Permanent Operation Description/Theory of Operation Permanent Parts List & Placement/BOM Permanent Tune-Up Procedure Permanent Schematics
--------------------------- Test Setup Photos Permanent *1 Users Manual _Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc._ has spent substantial effort in developing this product and it is one of the first of its kind in industry. Having the subject information easily available to "competition" would negate the advantage they have achieved by developing this product. Not protecting the details of the design will result in financial hardship. Permanent Confidentiality:
The applicant requests the exhibits listed above as permanently confidential be permanently withheld from public review due to materials that contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. Short-Term Confidentiality for FCC Applications:
The applicant requests the exhibits selected above as short term confidential be withheld from public view for a period of __ (specify number of days not to exceed 180)2___ days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization and prior to marketing. This is to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public. Applicant is also aware that they are responsible to notify ACB in the event information regarding the product or the product is made available to the public before the requested period has expired. ACB will then release the documents listed above for public disclosure pursuant to FCC Public Notice DA 04-1705. Short Term Confidentiality for Industry Canada Applications:
Starting May 2022, ISED will recognize short term confidentiality on certain exhibits until the intended date of marketing. The applicant requests the exhibits selected above as short term confidential be withheld from public view until: (specify ISED expiration date / date of marketing) . Sincerely, By:
(Signature/Title3) Chongjie Yuan
(Print name) 1 - The asterisked items (*) require further information to be provided to ACB before permanent confidentiality will be extended to these exhibits. Please refer to FCC KDB 726920 and the specific Document link for D01 found at:
https://apps.fcc.gov/oetcf/kdb/forms/FTSSearchResultPage.cfm?switch=P&id=41731 and review section II, 3) regarding specific information that must accompany these requests. 2 - Please refer to https://acbcert.com/documents/misc-docs/Memo-Short-Term-Vs-Standard-Confidentiality.pdf for complete details. 3 - Must be signed by applicant contact given for applicant on the FCC site, or by the authorized agent if an appropriate authorized agent letter has been provided. Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead. 050222-17
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 118.58 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Small Size 2.4 GHz PCB antenna Application Note AN043 By Audun Andersen 1 KEYWORDS CC25xx CC24xx CC2480 PCB antenna 2 INTRODUCTION The PCB antenna used on the CC2511 USB dongle reference design is described in this application note. Even if the antenna presented is for a USB dongle design it can be used in all 2.4 GHz designs, especially where small space is required for the antenna. This application note describes the antenna dimensions, the RF performance USB dongle 2.4 GHz Inverted F Antenna for complying with and considerations regulatory limits when using this design. The suggested antenna design requires no more than 15.2 x 5.7 mm of space and ensures a VSWR ratio of less than 2 across the 2.4 GHz ISM band when connected to a 50 ohm source. Figure 1: CC2511 USB Dongle SWRA117D Page 1 of 21 Application Note AN043 Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 KEYWORDS ................................................................................................................... 1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................. 1 ABBREVIATIONS........................................................................................................... 2 ANTENNA DESIGN........................................................................................................ 3 DESIGN GOALS.......................................................................................................... 3 SIMULATION............................................................................................................... 3 LAYOUT AND IMPLEMENTATION ................................................................................... 4 TEST RESULTS ............................................................................................................. 5 REFLECTION .............................................................................................................. 5 RADIATION PATTERN.................................................................................................. 7 OUTPUT POWER ...................................................................................................... 15 SPURIOUS EMISSION AND HARMONICS...................................................................... 17 CONCLUSION .............................................................................................................. 20 GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................................... 21 DOCUMENT HISTORY................................................................................................ 21 4.1 4.2 4.3 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 7.1 5 6 7 3 ABBREVIATIONS Computer Aided Design CC2400, CC2420, CC2430 and CC2431 CC2500, CC2510, CC2511, CC2550 and CC2520 Z-Accel ZigBee Processor Inverted F Antenna Industrial, Scientific and Medical Line Of Sight Printed Circuit Board Packet Error Rate Voltage Standing Wave Ratio CAD CC24xx CC25xx CC2480 IFA ISM LOS PCB PER VSWR SWRA117D Page 2 of 21 Application Note AN043 4 ANTENNA DESIGN The PCB antenna on the CC2511 USB dongle reference design is a meandered Inverted F Antenna (IFA). The IFA was designed to match an impedance of 50 ohm at 2.45 GHz. Thus no additional matching components are necessary. 4.1 Design Goals The reflection at the feed point of the antenna determines how much of the applied power is delivered to the antenna. A reflection of less than -10 dB across the 2.4 GHz ISM band, when connected to a 50 ohm source, was a design goal. Reflection of less than -10 dB, or VSWR less than 2, ensures that more than 90% of the available power is delivered to the antenna. Bandwidth is in this document defined as the frequency band where more than 90% of the available power is delivered to the antenna. Another design goal was to fit the size of the PCB antenna on a USB dongle and to obtain good performance also when the dongle is connected to a computer. 4.2 Simulation IE3D from Zeland, which is an electromagnetic simulation tool, was used to design the antenna. The accuracy of the simulation is controlled by the mesh. An increase of the mesh increases the simulation time. Thus, for initial simulations mesh = 1 should be used. When a fairly good result is achieved a higher mesh should be used to obtain more accurate results. Comparison of simulation and measurement results shows that the measured reflection is between the result obtained with mesh = 5 and mesh = 1; see Figure 2 for details. Figure 2: Comparison of Simulation and Measurements Results SWRA117D Page 3 of 21 Application Note AN043 4.3 Layout and Implementation Small changes of the antenna dimensions may have large impact on the performance. Therefore it is strongly recommended to make an exact copy of the reference design to achieve optimum performance. The easiest way to implement the antenna is to import the gerber or DXF file showing the antenna layout. These files are named IFA_USB.spl and IFA_USB.dxf respectively and are included in the CC2511 USB dongle reference design available from http://www.ti.com\lpw. The imported file can be used as a template when drawing the antenna. By using this procedure it should be possible to make an exact copy. If the PCB CAD tool being used does not support import of DXF or gerber files, Figure 3 and Table 1 should be used to ensure correct implementation. It is recommended to generate a gerber file for comparison with IFA_USB.spl when making a manual implementation. Most gerber viewers have the possibility to import several gerber files at the same time. Thus by placing the gerber file, showing the manually implemented antenna, on top of IFA_USB.spl it is easy to verify that the antenna is correctly implemented. It is also recommended to use the same thickness and type of PCB material as used in the reference design. Information about the PCB can be found in a separate readme file included in the reference design. To compensate for a thicker/thinner PCB the antenna could be made slightly shorter/longer. Figure 3: Antenna Dimensions L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 W1 W2 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 3.94 mm 2.70 mm 5.00 mm 2.64 mm 2.00 mm 4.90 mm 0.90 mm 0.50 mm 0.50 mm 0.30 mm 0.30 mm 0.50 mm 1.40mm 1.70 mm Table 1: Antenna Dimensions SWRA117D Page 4 of 21 Application Note AN043 5 TEST RESULTS Reflection, radiation pattern and variation of output power across a wide frequency band were measured to verify the performance of the PCB antenna. Measurements of the dongle in free space and when connected to a laptop were performed to verify that the antenna is suitable both for USB dongle designs and in a standalone application. Free space is in this document interpreted as a measurement performed without connecting the dongle to a computer. In such a measurement the dongle is only powered by a battery. 5.1 Reflection All the reflection measurements were performed with a network analyzer connected to a semi-rigid coax cable, which was soldered to the feed point of the antenna. Because of the small size antenna and the small ground plane this kind of measurements is heavily affected by the presence and placement of the coax cable. This influence can result in a small uncertainty in resonance frequency and measured reflection. Typically different placement of the semi-rigid coax cable could change the resonance frequency with 5 -10 MHz and the reflection with 3 - 4 dB. Figure 4: Influence of Plastic Encapsulation and Test Pins SWRA117D Page 5 of 21 Application Note AN043 A small part on the CC2511 USB dongle PCB is equipped with test pins. These are intended for use during development. This part of the PCB will typically be omitted in a final application. The red and green graph on Figure 4 shows that removing this part of the PCB has a small impact on the performance. Figure 4 also shows that plastic encapsulation of the dongle will shift the resonance frequency to a lower frequency. This can be compensated by making the antenna slightly shorter. The size of the ground plane affects the performance of the PCB antenna. Connecting the USB dongle to a computer increases the size of the ground plane and thus the performance is affected. Figure 5 shows how the performance is affected when the USB dongle is connected to a laptop. In free space the antenna has a bandwidth of approximately 250 MHz. When the USB dongle is connected to the laptop the bandwidth is reduced to around 100 MHz, which still is enough to cover the whole 2.4 GHz ISM band. Figure 5: Comparison of Performance SWRA117D Page 6 of 21 Application Note AN043 5.2 Radiation Pattern The radiation pattern for the antenna implemented on the CC2511 USB dongle reference design has been measured in an anechoic chamber. Figure 7 through Figure 12 shows radiation patterns for three planes, XY, XZ and YZ, measured with vertical and horizontal polarization. All these measurement were performed without connecting the dongle to a computer. Figure 13 and Figure 14 shows the radiation pattern when the dongle is connected to a laptop. All measurements were performed with 0 dBm output power. Figure 6 shows how the different radiation patters are related to the positioning of the antenna. XY plane YZ plane XZ plane Figure 6: How to Relate the Antenna to the Radiation Patterns SWRA117D Page 7 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 7: USB Dongle XY Plane SWRA117D Page 8 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 8: USB Dongle XY Plane SWRA117D Page 9 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 9: USB Dongle XZ Plane SWRA117D Page 10 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 10: USB Dongle XZ Plane SWRA117D Page 11 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 11: USB Dongle YZ Plane SWRA117D Page 12 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 12: USB Dongle YZ Plane SWRA117D Page 13 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 13: USB Dongle in Laptop XY Plane SWRA117D Page 14 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 14: USB Dongle in Laptop XY Plane 5.3 Output Power To make a realistic bandwidth measurement of the antenna a small test program was used. The test program stepped the center frequency of a carrier from 2.3 to 2.8 GHz. This bandwidth measurement was also done to verify the result from the reflection measurements, described in section 5.1. The output power was measured using max hold on a spectrum analyzer. CC2511 was programmed for 0 dBm output power and the antenna was horizontally oriented and directed towards the receiving antenna. This corresponds to 0 in the XY plane on Figure 6. The bandwidth measurements were not performed with a correction factor on the spectrum analyzer. Thus, the results in Figure 15 and Figure 16 only show the relative changes in output power and not the actual level. Figure 15 shows the bandwidth of the antenna when the dongle is not connected to a computer. The result shows that the antenna has a variation in output power of less than 3 dB across a frequency band of more than 350 MHz. This demonstrates that the antenna has a SWRA117D Page 15 of 21 Application Note AN043 broadband characteristic. Maximum output power is measured to be at 2.54 GHz. Thus if the same antenna is implemented on a PCB with similar size and if the application is only intended for stand alone usage the antenna could be made slightly longer to obtain best performance at 2.42 GHz. Figure 15: Output Power, USB Dongle The reflection results in Figure 5 indicate that the output power will be slightly reduced when the dongle is connected to a laptop. Comparison of the results in Figure 15 and Figure 16 shows that the output power is reduced by approximately 2 dB when the dongle is connected to a laptop. This agrees with the results in Figure 5. SWRA117D Page 16 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 16: Output Power, USB Dongle in Laptop 5.4 Spurious Emission and Harmonics Table 2 shows measured output power and emission at the second harmonic. Above the second harmonic no peaks were detected when measuring TX emission. This can be seen from Figure 17 and Figure 18. These measurements were performed according to FCC requirements. An approximate conversion to dBm can be done by subtracting 95 from the measured value in dBV/m. Since the measurement setup for ETSI and FCC is different this conversion will not give an exact result, but typically it will give a result that is within 1-2 dB of the result from a correct ETSI measurement. Output power 2.44 GHz 4.88 GHz 1 dBm 0 dBm
-2 dBm 56.1 dBV/m 54.3 dBV/m 52.5 dBV/m Table 2: Measured Level of Output Power and Harmonics 96.9 dBV/m 96.1 dBV/m 93.1 dBV/m ETSI and FCC limits for output power and TX spurious emission are shown in Table 3. FCC allows for up to 20 dB higher emission if duty cycling is used. Thus, it is possible to use the antenna described in this document and be compliant with both ETSI and FCC regulation. SWRA117D Page 17 of 21 Application Note AN043 2.4 2.483 GHz EN 300 328 EN 300 440 20 dBm 10 dBm*
2. harm
-30 dBm
-30 dBm
*Depends on the power class.
** Depends on the number of channels being used. FCC 15.247 125 dBV/m 116 dBV/m**
54 dBV/m FCC 15.249 94 dBV/m 54 dBV/m Table 3: ETSI and FCC Limits Figure 17: TX Spurious Emission 1 5 GHz SWRA117D Page 18 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 18: TX Spurious Emission 5.5 8.5 GHz As opposed to FCC, ETSI has specific RX emission requirements. Table 4 and Table 5 list the ETSI RX spurious requirements. 30 MHz to 1 GHz 1 GHz to 12.75 GHz Narrowband spurious emission Wideband spurious emission
-57 dBm
-47 dBm
-107 dBm/Hz
-97 dBm/Hz Table 4: EN 300 328 RX Spurious Requirements 25 MHz to 1 GHz 1 GHz to 10 times the carrier frequency*
-57 dBm
-47 dBm
*Applies for equipment operating between 1 GHz and 20 GHz. Table 5: EN 300 440 RX Spurious Requirements The only signal detected above the noise floor when measuring RX spurious emission was the VCO leakage at 4.89 GHz. Figure 19 shows that the measured VCO leakage is below ETSI limits. SWRA117D Page 19 of 21 Application Note AN043 Figure 19: RX Spurious Emission 6 CONCLUSION This application note shows that it is possible to implement a 2.4 GHz antenna on a small area and still achieve good performance. Table 6 lists the most important properties of the Inverted F Antenna, described in this document. The free line of sight (LOS) range was measured with 250 kbps and 1 % PER. Gain in XY plane Gain in XZ plane Gain in YZ plane Gain in XY plane, connected to laptop LOS range Antenna size 4.5 dB 5.3 dB 5.3 dB 3.3 dB 240 m 15.2 x 5.7 mm Table 6: IFA Properties (Measured on CC2511 Dongle Reference Design) The results provided in section 5 shows that it is possible to comply with both ETSI and FCC regulations when implementing the suggested antenna together with CC2511 on a USB dongle. SWRA117D Page 20 of 21 Application Note AN043 7 GENERAL INFORMATION 7.1 Document History Revision SWRA117D SWRA117C SWRA117B SWRA117A SWRA117 Date 2008-04-04 2008-02-27 2007-06-01 2007-01-08 2006-11-28 Description/Changes Changed CCZACC06 to CC2480 Added reference to CCZACC06 and CC2520 Changed name of document Added more dimensions in Figure 3 and Table 1 Initial release. SWRA117D Page 21 of 21 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TIs terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TIs standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions. Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in such safety-critical applications. TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use. TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements. Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products amplifier.ti.com Amplifiers dataconverter.ti.com Data Converters dsp.ti.com DSP www.ti.com/clocks Clocks and Timers interface.ti.com Interface logic.ti.com Logic power.ti.com Power Mgmt microcontroller.ti.com Microcontrollers RFID www.ti-rfid.com RF/IF and ZigBee Solutions www.ti.com/lprf www.ti.com/audio www.ti.com/automotive www.ti.com/broadband www.ti.com/digitalcontrol www.ti.com/medical www.ti.com/military www.ti.com/opticalnetwork www.ti.com/security www.ti.com/telephony www.ti.com/video www.ti.com/wireless Applications Audio Automotive Broadband Digital Control Medical Military Optical Networking Security Telephony Video & Imaging Wireless Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright 2008, Texas Instruments Incorporated
| various | Test Report | 2.21 MiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Date: August 7, 2026 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 (Original Grant date: 10/24/2020) Applicant: Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc To Whom It May Concern:
This is to request a Class II Permissive change for adding a series of hosts, the FCC ID of the Single module is FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 The major change filed under this application is:
The subject approved module is being used in a specific host, Model: HJC32L-X-X-X-X-X-XXX-X-
X-XXXXX-XX For specific model differences, please refer to the model difference letter. No changes have been made to the certified module hardware, RF circuitry, antenna type, operating frequency, output power, or firmware affecting RF characteristics. 1. Radiated emissions was tested again and demonstrated to compliant to the limit per 47CFR 15.247, 15.205 and 15.209. 2. RF exposure evaluation was tested and demonstrated to compliant to 47CFR 15.2091. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Signature:
Name: Chongjie Yuan E-mail: [email protected] Company name: Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 204.61 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Declaration We, Name: Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Address: NO.78 Kongquehe 4th Road, Qingdao Clothing Industry park, Jimo, Qingdao, Shandong Province, China declare that HJC32L-X-X-X-X-X-XXX-X-X-XXXXX-XX has the fully same BLE module. The difference is the enclosure and the non-RF part in the PCB. The product differences are the power socket type, presence or absence of a vertical board, housing color, serial number, and whether a multi-
function external interface is included. The detailed models are listed below. Declared by: Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Name: Chongjie Yuan Signature:
Date: August 7, 2026
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 191.32 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc NO.78 Kongquehe 4th Road, Qingdao Clothing Industry park, Jimo, Qingdao, Shandong Province China Date: 08-05-2025 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division. 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 FRN: 0025672221 US Agent Attestation Statement / Part 2.911(d)(7) Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc certifies, that as of 08-05-2025, we have designated FCC US Agent, LLC to accept service of process on our behalf for FCC ID:
Z2AJJGHJ8258. Qingdao Richmat Iritelligence Technology Inc certifies, accepts to maintain an agent of service of process in the United States for no less than one year after either the grantee has permanently terminated all marketing and importation of the applicable equipment within the U.S., or the conclusion of any Commission-related administrative or judicial proceeding involving the equipment, whichever is later. FCC US Agent, LLC, accepts as of the date of the filing of this application, the obligation of being the designated agent for the purpose of accepting service of process on behalf of Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc for FCC ID: 2AJJGRJ6295. Designated Agent Information:
Company Name: FCC US Agent, LLC FRN: 0033402884 Address: 3722 Illinois Avenue, Saint Charles, IL, 60174, USA Contact Person: Tim Payne ;
Phone: 708-571-3148 ern, I EN ae Ra tg Reel RS eh dE sincerely, Company: Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Designated Agent: FCC US Agent, LLC Technology Inc Company Representative: Chongjie Yuan Designated Agent. Representative: Tim Payne Tim )} Semen. Signature: [Signature] Aria Signaturg. see
| various | Attestation Statements | 3.75 MiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
| various | Test Setup Photos | 535.76 KiB | August 12 2026 / August 25 2026 |
QingdaoRichmatIntelligenceTechnologyInc FederalCommunicationsCommission AuthorizationandEvaluationDivision 7435OaklandMillsRoad Columbia,MD21046 USA Date:04242026 Ref:AttestationStatementsPart2.911(d)(5)(i)Filing FCCID:2AJJGHJ8258 QingdaoRichmatIntelligenceTechnologyInc(theapplicant)certifiesthattheequipmentforwhich authorizationissoughtisnotcoveredequipmentprohibitedfromreceivinganequipment authorizationpursuanttosection2.903oftheFCCrules. QingdaoRichmatIntelligenceTechnologyInc(theapplicant)certifiesthattheequipmentforwhich authorizationissoughtdoesnotincludecybersecurityorantivirussoftwareproducedorprovidedby KasperskyLab,Inc.oranyofitssuccessorsandassignees,includingequipmentwithintegratedKaspersky Lab,Inc.(oranyofitssuccessorsandassignees)cybersecurityorantivirussoftwarepursuanttoDA24 886andKDB986446D01CoveredEquipmentGuidancesectionB(2a). Deviceisinherentlycompliantbasedonhardwarelimitationsorsoftwarecontrols. or ASoftwareBillofMaterials(SBOM)isprovidedtotheTCBforreview,and Theenduserorthirdpartiescannotinstalladditionalsoftwareonthisdevice. Sincerely,
(Applicantsignature)
(ChongjieYuan) Rev 1/26/2023 QingdaoRichmatIntelligenceTechnologyInc FederalCommunicationsCommission AuthorizationandEvaluationDivision 7435OaklandMillsRoad Columbia,MD21046 USA Date:04242026 Ref:AttestationStatementsPart2.911(d)(5)(ii)Filing FCCID:2AJJGHJ8258 QingdaoRichmatIntelligenceTechnologyInc(theapplicant)certifiesthat,asofthedateofthefilingof theapplication,theapplicantisnotidentifiedontheCoveredList(asaspecificallynamedentityorany ofitssubsidiariesoraffiliates)asanentityproducingcoveredequipment. Sincerely,
(Applicantsignature)
(ChongjieYuan) Rev 1/26/2023
| various | Attestation Statements | 118.42 KiB | July 27 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 POWER OF ATTORNEY Date: Apr. 24, 2026 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 To Whom It May Concern:
We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Waltek Testing Group Co., Ltd. (Deval Qin) on our behalf, to apply to the Federal Communications Commission on our equipment. Any and all acts carried out by Waltek Testing Group Co., Ltd. (Deval Qin) on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. This authorization expires on Apr. 23, 2027. Sincerely, Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Signature Chongjie Yuan /Certification engineer Typed name and Title
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 14.42 KiB | July 27 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Applicants complete, legal business name:
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Applicants mailing address:
NO. 78 Kongquehe 4th Road Qingdao Clothing Industry park Jimo, Qingdao, Shandong 266000, China FCCID Number and Date of Original Grant:
2AJJGHJ8258, 10/24/2020 Person at the Applicants address to receive Grant (name, title, e-mail):
(Include mailing address if other than above):
Chongjie Yuan, Certification engineer, [email protected] This is to request a Class II Permissive chang for adding a host, the FCC ID of the Single Modular is 2AJJGHJ8258 The subject approved module is being used in a specific host, Model: T87-L-2-S-XX 1. Radiated emission was tested again and demonstrates to compliant to the limit per 47CFR 15.247, 15.205 and 15.209. 2. RF exposure evaluation was tested and demonstrates to compliant to 47CFR 15.2091. Sincerely,
[Signature]
Date: 2026-04-24
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 124.16 KiB | July 27 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc NO.78 Kongquehe 4th Road, Qingdao Clothing Industry park, Jimo, Qingdao, Shandong Province China Date: 08-05-2025 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 FRN: 0025672221 US Agent Attestation Statement / Part 2.911(d)(7) Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc certifies, that as of 08-05-2025, we have designated FCC US Agent, LLC to accept service of process on our behalf for FCC ID:
2AJJGHJ8258. Qingdao Richmat Iritelligence Technology Inc certifies, accepts to maintain an agent of service of process in the United States for no less than one year after either the grantee has permanently terminated all marketing and importation of the applicable equipment within the U.S., or the conclusion of any Commission-related administrative or judicial proceeding involving the equipment, whichever is later. FCC US Agent, LLC, accepts as of the date of the filing of this application, the obligation of being the designated agent for the purpose of accepting service of process on behalf of Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc for FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258. Designated Agent Information:
Company Name: FCC US Agent, LLC FRN: 0033402884 Address: 3722 Illinois Avenue, Saint Charles, IL, 60174, USA Contact Person: Tim Payne Phone: 708-571-3148 Email: [email protected] Sincerely, Company: Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Designated Agent: FCC US Agent, LLC Technology Inc Company Representative: Chongjie Yuan Designated Agent Representative: Tim Payne Signature: [Signature] CA.wiie {, Signature:
| various | Attestation Statements | 934.56 KiB | July 27 2026 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Authority to Act as Agent Date: January 26, 2024 American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue Suite 300 Falls Church, VA 22046 To Whom It May Concern:
______Intertek Testing Service Shanghai______ is authorized to act on our behalf, until otherwise notified, for applications to American Certification Body, Inc. (ACB). We certify that we are not subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge (47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. Thank you, Agency Agreement Expiration Date: ____January 25, 2025_____ By:
(Signature1) __________ Chongjie Yuan ___________
(Print name) Title:
__________ Certified engineer ___________ On behalf of: ___________ Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc_________
(Company Name) Telephone:
_________+86 15192777001______________ 1 - Must be signed by applicant contact given for applicant on the FCC site, or by the authorized agent if an appropriate authorized agent letter has been provided. Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead. 050222-17
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 698.90 KiB | February 01 2024 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Certification Application Attestation Statements Date: January 26, 2024 American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue Suite 300 Falls Church, VA 22046 To Whom It May Concern:
Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(i) ______(Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc)______ certifies that as of the date of the application the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment 1 prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. If the equipment for which the applicant seeks authorization is produced by any of the entities identified on the current Covered List, including affiliates or subsidiaries of the named companies, the applicant must include an explanation on why the equipment is not covered equipment. Additional Explanation: <N/A>
Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(ii) ______(Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc)______ (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of this application, the applicant identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment.
- is not
- is /
Thank you, By:
__________________________ ______ Chongjie Yuan__________
(Signature2)
(Print name) Title:
_________ Certified engineer _________ Company:
_________ Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc ______________ Telephone:
_________+86 15192777001________________ 1 - The Commissions Covered List is published by the Public Safety and Homeland Security Bureau and posted on the Commissions website. This Covered List, which is periodically updated, identifies particular equipment, produced by particular entities, that constitutes covered equipment. https://www.fcc.gov/supplychain/coveredlist . 2 - Letters must be placed on appropriate letterhead. 041023-17 rev 7
| various | Attestation Statements | 712.00 KiB | February 01 2024 |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Request for Class II Permissive Change FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 Data: January 26, 2024 TO: Federal Communication Commission Please be notified that we, the undersigned, Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc declare that the reasons for this Class II permissive change are as below:
1. This change is based on FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 granted on October 24, 2020. 2. Add 1 model of host. The new model of host is HJSR95 Ble. Thank you. Sincerely, By:
__________________________ ____ Chongjie Yuan____
(Signature1)
(Print name) Title:
_______Certified engineer___ On behalf of: Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc
(Company Name) Telephone: ______+86 15192777001___
| various | Cover Letter(s) | 648.71 KiB | February 01 2024 |
FCC US Agent, LLC U.S. Agent Designation for Service of Process
(Applicant and U.S. Agent are Separate Parties) TO: American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue Suite 300 Falls Church, VA 22046 ATTENTION: FCC Certification Section 2.911(d)(7) Information Designated U.S. Agent Company Name:FCC US Agent, LLC FRN:0033402884 Contact Name:Tim Payne Street Address:3722 Illinois Avenue City/Province/Zip:Saint Charles, IL, 60174 Telephone No:708-571-3148 Email:[email protected] This letter is to confirm that we (the Designated U.S. Agent) have accepted the responsibility to act as the Designated U.S. Agent for Service of Process as required by section 47 CFR 2.911(d)(7) on behalf of the Applicant noted below. U.S. Agent Signature:
Date:January 18, 2024 Signed by (Printed Name/Title):Tim Payne/Manager The Applicant acknowledges that they must maintain an agent for no less than one year after terminating all marketing and importation OR the conclusion of any Commission-
related proceeding involving the equipment. The applicant further acknowledges their responsibility to inform the FCC whenever the Designated U.S. Agent information above changes. Applicant Company name:Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc Grantee Code:2AJJG FCC ID: 2AJJGHJ8258 FRN:0025672221 Contact Name:Chongjie Yuan Street Address:NO.78 Kongquehe 4th Road, Qingdao Clothing Industry park City/Province/Zip:Qingdao, Shandong Province, China Telephone No: +86 15192777001 Email:[email protected] Applicant Signature1:
Date:January 18, 2024 Signed by (Printed Name/Title):ChongjieYuan/Certifiedengineer 1 - Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead.
| various | Attestation Statements | 156.98 KiB | February 01 2024 |
| various | RF Exposure Info | 774.01 KiB | January 26 2024 / January 28 2024 |
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2026-08-25 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II Permissive Change |
| 2 | 2026-07-27 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
| 3 | 2026-04-30 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 4 | 2025-09-23 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 5 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
| 6 | 2025-04-22 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 7 | 2025-04-15 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 8 | 2024-10-29 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II Permissive Change |
| 9 | 2024-02-01 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 10 | 2024-01-28 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 11 | 2023-10-10 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 12 | 2023-04-11 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
| 13 | 2023-01-05 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II Permissive Change |
| 14 | 2022-11-23 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 15 | 2022-08-18 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 16 | 2022-07-03 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 17 | 2022-05-10 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 18 | 2022-01-07 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 19 | 2021-12-10 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 20 | 2021-11-23 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 21 | 2021-11-22 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 22 | 2021-10-21 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 23 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
| 24 | 2021-06-25 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 25 | 2020-10-24 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| various | Effective |
2026-08-25
|
||||
| various |
2026-07-27
|
|||||
| various |
2026-04-30
|
|||||
| various |
2025-09-23
|
|||||
| various |
2025-04-22
|
|||||
| various |
2025-04-15
|
|||||
| various |
2024-10-29
|
|||||
| various |
2024-02-01
|
|||||
| various |
2024-01-28
|
|||||
| various |
2023-10-10
|
|||||
| various |
2023-04-11
|
|||||
| various |
2023-01-05
|
|||||
| various |
2022-11-23
|
|||||
| various |
2022-08-18
|
|||||
| various |
2022-07-03
|
|||||
| various |
2022-05-10
|
|||||
| various |
2022-01-07
|
|||||
| various |
2021-12-10
|
|||||
| various |
2021-11-23
|
|||||
| various |
2021-11-22
|
|||||
| various |
2021-10-21
|
|||||
| various |
2021-06-25
|
|||||
| various |
2020-10-24
|
|||||
| various | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Qingdao Richmat Intelligence Technology Inc
|
||||
| various | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0025672221
|
||||
| various | Physical Address |
NO.78 Kongquehe 4th Road, Qingdao Clothing Industry park
|
||||
| various |
NO.78 Kongquehe 4th Road
|
|||||
| various |
Jimo, Qingdao, Shandong Province, N/A
|
|||||
| various |
China
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| various | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@acbcert.com
|
||||
| various |
c******@industrial-ia.com
|
|||||
| various |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
|||||
| various |
T******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
| various |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
| various | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| various | Grantee Code |
2AJJG
|
||||
| various | Equipment Product Code |
HJ8258
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| various | Name |
C******** Y********
|
||||
| various | Telephone Number |
+86 5******** Extension:
|
||||
| various | Fax Number |
+86 5********
|
||||
| various |
y******@richmat.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| various | Firm Name |
Intertek Testing Services (Shanghai FTZ) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
| various |
Intertek Testing Services Shanghai
|
|||||
| various |
Intertek Testing Services Limited Shanghai
|
|||||
| various | Name |
S****** G****
|
||||
| various | Physical Address |
Building No.86, 1198 Qinzhou Road(North)
|
||||
| various |
Building N0.86,1198 Qinzhou Road(North)
|
|||||
| various |
Shanghai, 200233
|
|||||
| various |
China
|
|||||
| various | Telephone Number |
02161********
|
||||
| various |
+8621********
|
|||||
| various |
+8621********
|
|||||
| various |
s******@intertek.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| various | Firm Name |
FCC US Agent, LLC
|
||||
| various | Name |
T******** P********
|
||||
| various | Physical Address |
3722 Illinois Avenue, Saint Charles, IL, 60174, US
|
||||
| various |
3722 Illinois Avenue
|
|||||
| various |
Saint Charles, 60174
|
|||||
| various |
Saint Charles, Illinois 60174
|
|||||
| various |
United States
|
|||||
| various | Telephone Number |
708-5********
|
||||
| various |
S******@FCCUSAgent.com
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| various | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| various | No | |||||
| various | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| various | Yes | |||||
| various | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 10/26/2026 | ||||
| various | 04/08/2024 | |||||
| various | 10/09/2023 | |||||
| various | 07/04/2023 | |||||
| various | 05/22/2023 | |||||
| various | 02/15/2023 | |||||
| various | 12/31/2022 | |||||
| various | 11/07/2022 | |||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| various | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| various | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| various | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Control Box | ||||
| various | Voice Remote control | |||||
| various | Handset | |||||
| various | HJSR69G Ble | |||||
| various | Module | |||||
| various | HJSR95 Ble | |||||
| various | HJC53 Ble | |||||
| various | Single mode Bluetooth(5.0) Module | |||||
| various | HANDSET | |||||
| various | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| various | Modular Equipment Type | Single Modular Approval | ||||
| various | Limited Single Modular Approval | |||||
| various | Does not apply | |||||
| various | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
| various | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | |||||
| various | Original Equipment | |||||
| various | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| various | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| various | Grant Comments | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: Authorized integration into HJC32L series control box devices (Models HJC32L-X-X-X-X-X-XXX-X-X-XXXXX-XX). | ||||
| various | Single module approval. Output Power listed is the maximum conducted output power. This device must be installed and operated so as to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures, or as evaluated in this filing. Class II Permissive Change: Authorizes integration into Richmat Voice Box devices (Models T87-L-2-S-XX and T87-L-2-A-XX). | |||||
| various | Output Power listed is the maximum conducted output power. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures, or as evaluated in this filing. Device meets SAR Exemption at 5mm for Portable use. Class II Change Updated model HJH106C - | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Change: Device meets SAR exemption for portable use. additional host model added: HJH158B Ble. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Change: Device meets SAR exemption for portable use. Additional host model added: HJSR38 Ble. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this module into a specific portable category configuration (Model: HJSR69G Ble) | |||||
| various | Power Output listed is Conducted. Modular Approval. This device is granted for use in Mobile only configurations in which the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Only those antenna(s) tested with the device or similar antenna(s) with equal or lesser gain may be used with this transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The Grantee is responsible for providing the documentation required for modular use. The responsibility for the use of this module, in all configurations utilized or contemplated, remains with the Grantee. This is a C2PC application to add new hosts and the host environment is Mobile-Single Source. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Change : device meets SAR exemption for portable use. additional host models added HJSR96 Ble, HJSR96B Ble, HJSR96C Ble. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. This is a C2PC application to add a new host and the host environment is Portable-Single Source. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. This is a C2PC application to add a new host and the host environment is Mobile-Single Source. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: Authorizes portable exposure applications when integrated into Richmat remote control devices, models HJSR81 Ble, HJSR81B Ble, HJSR81C Ble,HJSR81D Ble, HJSR81E Ble, HJSR77 Ble, HJSR77B Ble, HJSR77C Ble, HJSR32 Ble, HJSR32B Ble, HJSR32C Ble, and HJSR79 Ble. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this module into a specific portable category configuration (Models: HJH55BA Ble and HJH173 Ble). | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this module into a specific portable category configuration (Models: : HJH92B Ble ,HJH92E Ble, and HJH92S Ble). | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this module into a specific portable category configuration (Model: HJH159B Ble) | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this module into a specific portable category configuration. (Model: HJH82B Ble, HJSR04 Ble). | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this module into a specific portable category configuration. (Model: HJH55 Ble, HJH37 Ble, HJH129 Ble, HJH129B Ble, HJH13D Ble, HJSR03 Ble, HJSR05 Ble, HJH163 Ble) | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this Module into a specific Portable category configuration. (Model: HJH55B Ble, HJH109 Ble, HJH124 Ble and HJSR06 Ble) | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this Module into a specific host. (Portable category configuration, model: HJT53B Ble). | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this Module into a specific host. (Model: HJC9G Ble, HJC9 Ble, HJC18 Ble, HJC26C Ble) | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this Module into a specific host. (Model: HJH55 Ble, HJH124 Ble) | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this Module into a specific Portable category configuration. (Model: HJC25C, HJC52 Ble, HJC53 Ble, HJC56 Ble) | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. Class II Permissive Change: This change is to incorporate this Module into a specific Portable category configuration. (Model: HJH13B Ble) | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. C2PC: The module is being used in a specific host. | |||||
| various | Single Modular Approval. Power listed is maximum power conducted. This device is to be used for portable applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. OEM integrators and end-Users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. | |||||
| various | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| various | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| various | Firm Name |
Intertek Testing Services (Shanghai FTZ) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
| various |
WALTEK TESTING GROUP CO., LTD.
|
|||||
| various |
EMTEK (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.
|
|||||
| various |
Waltek Testing Group (Foshan) Co. Ltd.
|
|||||
| various |
Intertek Testing Services Shanghai
|
|||||
| various |
Centre Testing International Group Co., Ltd
|
|||||
| various |
CENTRE TESTING INTERNATIONAL (SUZHOU) CO., LTD.
|
|||||
| various | Name |
L**** X****
|
||||
| various |
J******** Z******
|
|||||
| various |
L****** W****
|
|||||
| various |
W******** H****
|
|||||
| various |
V******** Z********
|
|||||
| various |
C**** L****
|
|||||
| various |
D****** W********
|
|||||
| various |
J******** L****
|
|||||
| various | Telephone Number |
86-21********
|
||||
| various |
0769-******** Extension:
|
|||||
| various |
86755********
|
|||||
| various |
+86-7********
|
|||||
| various |
+86 2********
|
|||||
| various |
N/A********
|
|||||
| various |
0512-********
|
|||||
| various |
86-75********
|
|||||
| various |
86 75********
|
|||||
| various |
l******@intertek.com
|
|||||
| various |
s******@waltek.com.cn
|
|||||
| various |
w******@emtek.com.cn
|
|||||
| various |
w******@waltek.com.cn
|
|||||
| various |
z******@cti-cert.com
|
|||||
| various |
c******@cti-cert.com
|
|||||
| various |
D******@cti-cert.com
|
|||||
| various |
j******@cti-cert.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 6 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 7 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 8 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 9 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 10 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 11 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 12 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 13 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 14 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 15 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 16 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 17 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 18 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 19 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 20 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 21 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 22 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 23 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 24 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 25 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0017000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC